C M CM Escalade - GM Canada Owner Centre · Cadillac Escalade Owner Manual...

2018

cadillac.com (U.S.)cadillac.ca (Canada)

2018

Escalade

84016525 A

Escalade

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

18_CAD_Escalade_COV_en_US_84016525A_2017JUN23.ai 1 6/21/2017 8:35:08 AM

Cadillac Escalade Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-11349344) - 2018 - crc - 6/21/17

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . . . . . 28

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . . 119

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 339

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . 366

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380


2 INTRODUCTION

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems, slogans,vehicle model names, and vehiclebody designs appearing in this manualincluding, but not limited to, GM, theGM logo, CADILLAC, the CADILLACEmblem, and ESCALADE aretrademarks and/or service marks ofGeneral Motors LLC, its subsidiaries,affiliates, or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “General Motorsof Canada Company” for CadillacMotor Division wherever it appears inthis manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, country specifications,features/applications that may not beavailable in your region, or changessubsequent to the printing of thisowner’s manual.

Refer to the purchase documentationrelating to your specific vehicle toconfirm the features.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle OwnersA French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ceguide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170USA

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in the backof the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 84016525 A First Printing ©2017 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


INTRODUCTION 3

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “Do Not,”“Do not do this,” or “Do not let thishappen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message, gauge,or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner’s manualhas additional instructions orinformation.

* : Shown when the service manualhas additional instructions orinformation.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbols thatmay be found on the vehicle and whatthey mean. See the features in thismanual for information.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

` : Do Not Puncture

^ : Do Not Service

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure


4 INTRODUCTION

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Seat Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak

a : Under Pressure

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


IN BRIEF 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Heated and Cooled Front Seats . . . 14Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . 14Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . 15Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . 16Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . 18Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . 21Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . 22Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . 22Surround Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . 23Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Automatic ParkingAssist (APA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . 24Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27


6 IN BRIEF

Instrument Panel


IN BRIEF 7

1. Air Vents 0 176.

2. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 145 (IfEquipped).

3. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals 0 165.

Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 120.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer0 122.

4. Hazard Warning Flashers 0 165.

5. Instrument Cluster 0 129.

6. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 202.

Tow/Haul Mode Selector Button.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 206.

Range Selection Mode Buttons (IfEquipped). See Manual Mode0 205.

7. Magnetic Ride Control Button.See Magnetic Ride Control 0 217.

Pedal Adjust Switch (IfEquipped). See Adjustable Throttleand Brake Pedal 0 194.

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 214.

8. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 164.

9. Infotainment 0 169.

10. Glove Box Button. See Glove Box0 115.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 241 (IfEquipped).

Parking Assist Button. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 229.

11. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 170.

Instrument Panel Storage 0 115.

12. CD Player. See the infotainmentmanual.

13. ENGINE START/STOP Button.See Ignition Positions 0 195.

14. Steering Wheel Controls 0 120.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Controls. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 143.

15. Horn 0 120.

16. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 120.

17. Hood Release. See Hood 0 261.

18. Cruise Control 0 218 (IfEquipped).

Adaptive Cruise Control 0 220 (IfEquipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 235 (If Equipped).

Heated Steering Wheel 0 120 (IfEquipped).

Phone Button. See theinfotainment manual.

19. Automatic Transfer Case Knob (IfEquipped). See Four-Wheel Drive0 207.

20. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 135.

21. Electric Parking Brake 0 212 (IfEquipped).

22. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 161.

23. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 166.


8 IN BRIEF

Initial Drive InformationThis section provides a brief overviewabout some of the important featuresthat may or may not be on yourspecific vehicle.

For more detailed information, refer toeach of the features which can befound later in this owner’s manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is used to remotely lockand unlock the doors from up to 60 m(197 ft) away from the vehicle.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within three seconds tounlock all remaining doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

b : Press twice to open or close theliftgate. Press once to stop the liftgatefrom moving.

c : Press twice to open the liftglass.

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locate. The turn signal lampsflash and the horn sound three times.

Press 7 and hold for more thanthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press 7 again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys 0 28 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System 0 29.

Remote Vehicle StartThe engine can be started fromoutside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on the RKEtransmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 36.


IN BRIEF 9

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on a power doorlock switch.

. Push down the manual lock knobon the driver door to lock alldoors. Push down the lock knobon a passenger door to lock thatdoor only.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock that door. Pull the handleagain to unlatch it.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle press Q or K onthe RKE transmitter or use the key inthe front doors. The key cylinder iscovered by a cap. See Door Locks 0 37.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 29.

Power Door Locks

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks 0 37.

Keyless Access

The RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate or door beingopened. Pressing the button on thedriver door handle will unlock thedriver door. If the handle button ispressed again within five seconds, thepassenger doors and liftgate will

unlock. See “Keyless Access Operation”in Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 29.

Liftgate

To open the liftgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press K onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter twice to unlock all doors.Press the touch pad (1) on theunderside of the liftgate handle andlift up. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 29.


10 IN BRIEF

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. This willcause the liftgate to be unlatched.

To open the liftglass, press thebutton (2) above the license plate.Close the liftglass before opening theliftgate to avoid damaging it.

Power Liftgate Operation

If equipped with a power liftgate, theswitch is on the overhead console. Thevehicle must be in P (Park).

Choose the power liftgate mode byselecting MAX or 3/4. Press8 onthe overhead console or on the RKEtransmitter pressb twice quickly.

Press any liftgate button while theliftgate is moving to stop it. Pressingagain reverses the direction.

To close, pressl on the bottom ofthe liftgate next to the latch.

To disable the power liftgate function,select OFF on the liftgate switch. SeeLiftgate 0 41.

Windows

Power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 199.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Seat Adjustment

Uplevel Seat Adjustment

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use all uplevel seat features.

Uplevel Seat Control

1. Feature Select2. Up3. Rearward4. Down5. Forward


IN BRIEF 11

. Move Feature Select (1) to displayseat adjustments on theinfotainment display. Press andrelease or hold to scroll throughfeatures.

. Press Up (2) to make upwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Rearward (3) to makerearward adjustments of theselected feature.

. Press Down (4) to make downwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Forward (5) to make forwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

Base Seat Adjustment

To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front part of theseat cushion by moving the frontof the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat by movingthe rear of the control up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 60.

Lumbar and Bolster Support



To adjust lumbar support, if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to lumbarsupport on the infotainmentdisplay.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust lumbar forward orrearward.

. Press Up (2) or Down (4) to adjustlumbar up or down.


12 IN BRIEF

See Lumbar Adjustment 0 61.

To adjust bolster support, if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to bolstersupport on the infotainmentdisplay.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust bolster support inward oroutward.


Upper Shoulder Support

To adjust upper shoulder support,if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to uppershoulder support on theinfotainment display.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust shoulder support forwardor rearward.


Reclining Seatbacks

Base Shown, Uplevel Similar

To adjust the seatback:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks 0 63.


IN BRIEF 13

Massage

Driver Seat Shown, Passenger SeatSimilar

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use the massage feature.

To activate and adjust massage:

1. Turn the selection control (1) toview massage options on theinfotainment display.

2. Select massage feature.

3. Press up or down to selectmassage type.

4. To activate massage at lastmassage type and intensitysettings or to turn massage off,press the massage On/Offcontrol (2).

See Massage 0 66.

Memory Features

If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to store and recall their uniqueseat positions for driving the vehicle,and a shared exit position for gettingout of the vehicle. Other featurepositions may also be set, such aspower mirrors, power steering wheel,and adjustable pedals, if equipped.

Memory positions are linked to RKEtransmitter 1 or 2 for automaticmemory recalls.

Before storing, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn theignition on and then press and releaseSET; a beep will sound. Thenimmediately press and hold 1, 2,orB (Exit) on the driver door untiltwo beeps sound. To manually recallthese positions, press and hold 1, 2,orB until the saved position isreached.

When Auto Memory Recall is enabledin the personalization menu, positionspreviously stored to memory buttons1 and 2 are recalled when the ignitionis changed from off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY.

When Easy Exit Options is enabled inthe personalization menu, the featureautomatically recalls the previouslystored exit position when exiting thevehicle. See Memory Seats 0 63.


14 IN BRIEF

Second Row SeatsThe second row seatbacks can befolded for additional cargo space,or the seats can be folded andtumbled for easy entry/exit to thethird row seats. The seatbacks alsorecline.

See Second Row Seats 0 69.

Third Row SeatsThird row seatbacks can be folded. SeeThird Row Seats 0 73.

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

The buttons are near the climatecontrols on the center stack. Tooperate, the engine must be running.

PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion and seatback.

PressC or { to cool the driver orpassenger seat.

See Heated and Cooled Front Seats0 66.

Head Restraint AdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatback reclineangle as little as necessary whilekeeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the proper position.

See Head Restraints 0 59 and PowerSeat Adjustment 0 60.

Seat Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to useseat belts properly:

. Seat Belts 0 75.

. How to Wear Seat Belts Properly0 76.

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 77.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 102.


IN BRIEF 15

Passenger Sensing System

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. No other airbag is affectedby the passenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 90

The passenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 134.

Mirror Adjustment

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

The mirror automatically dims toreduce the glare of headlamps frombehind. The dimming feature comeson when the vehicle is started.

Rear Camera Mirror

If equipped, this automatic dimmingrearview mirror provides a wide anglecamera view of the area behind thevehicle. Adjust the mirror with the tabpushed forward so that the display isoff. See Rear Camera Mirror 0 51.

Exterior Mirrors

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors 0 49.


16 IN BRIEF

Power Folding Mirrors

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

Heated Mirrors

PressK to heat the outside mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate Control System0 170.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel:

Press the control to move the steeringwheel up and down or forward andrearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving.

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

Press the top of the switch to movethe pedals closer to your body. Pressthe bottom of the switch to move thepedals away.

See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal0 194.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settings besaved and recalled. See Memory Seats0 63.


IN BRIEF 17

Interior LightingDome Lamps

There are dome lamps in the overheadconsole and the headliner, if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, even whena door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door is opened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY orusing Retained AccessoryPower (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.

For more information about interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 166.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

P : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol toP again will turn theautomatic headlamps and DRLback on.


18 IN BRIEF

For vehicles first sold in Canada, theoff position only works when thevehicle is shifted into the P (Park)position.

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off, dependingon outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlamps togetherwith the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 161

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)0 163

. Automatic Headlamp System 0 164

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is on theturn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withz FRONTon it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT : Use this setting forintermittent wipes or Rainsense™. Forintermittent wipes, turn thezFRONT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequent wipes.

To turn on Rainsense, presszAUTO on the lever, then turn thezFRONT band on the wiper lever toadjust the sensitivity.

. Turn the band up to a higher INTsetting for more sensitivity tomoisture.

. Turn the band down to the lowerINT setting for less sensitivity tomoisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

OFF : Turns the windshield wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes, holdthe band on8 longer.

Lm : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid on thewindshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 120.

Climate ControlsThe climate control buttons and thetouch screen are used to adjust theheating, cooling, and ventilation.


IN BRIEF 19

Center Stack Climate Controls

1. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

2. Fan Control

3. OFF (Fan)

4. Driver and Passenger Heated andCooled Seats

5. Recirculation

6. Rear Window Defogger

7. Defrost

8. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

Climate Control Display

1. Outside Temperature Display


3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)

6. Climate Control Selection(Application Tray Button)

7. Rear (Rear Climate ControlTouch Screen)

8. Air Delivery Mode Control

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 170 and Rear Climate ControlSystem 0 174 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

The Range Selection Mode switch,if equipped, is on the shift lever.

1. To enable the Range Selectionfeature, move the shift lever tothe L (Manual Mode) position.The current range will appearnext to the L. This is the highestattainable range with all lowergears accessible. As an example,when 5 (Fifth) gear is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gearsare available.


20 IN BRIEF

2. Press the plus/minus buttons onthe shift lever to select thedesired range of gears for currentdriving conditions. See ManualMode 0 205.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/Haul Modecan be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active. SeeTow/Haul Mode 0 206.

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped with four-wheel drive, theengine's driving power can be sent toall four wheels for extra traction.

Automatic Transfer Case

This transfer case knob is to the leftof the steering column.

The different drive options that maybe available are the following:

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface traction conditionsare variable.

Do not use AUTO mode to park on asteep grade with poor traction such asice, snow, mud or gravel. In AUTOmode only the rear wheels will holdthe vehicle from sliding when parked.If parking on a steep grade, use 4 m tokeep all four wheels engaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis setting when extra traction isneeded, such as on snowy or icy roadsor in most off-road situations.

N (Neutral) : Shift to this setting onlywhen towing the vehicle. See TrailerTowing 0 250.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Choose

4 n when driving in deep sand, mud,or snow, and while climbing ordescending steep hills.

See Four-Wheel Drive 0 207.


IN BRIEF 21

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE), andvoice or speech recognition. It alsoincludes information on settings.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steering wheelcontrols. See "Steering WheelControls" in the infotainment manual.

Cruise Control

J : Press to turn the system on andoff. A white indicator appears in theinstrument cluster when cruise isturned on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press the control up brieflyto resume that speed or press andhold to accelerate. If the cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press the control down brieflyto set the speed and activate cruisecontrol. If the cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruise controlwithout erasing the set speed frommemory.

See Cruise Control 0 218 or AdaptiveCruise Control 0 220 (if equipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.

y orz : Move SEL up or down togo to the previous or next selection.


22 IN BRIEF

S or T : Press to move between theinteractive display zones in thecluster. Press S to go back to theprevious menu.

SEL : Press to open a menu or select amenu item. Press and hold to resetvalues on certain screens.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 143.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a greenindicator,V, when a vehicle isdetected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow a vehicletoo closely. When approaching avehicle ahead too quickly, FCAprovides a flashing red alert on thewindshield and rapidly beeps or pulsesthe driver seat.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 235.

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA).When the system detects a vehicleahead in your path that is traveling inthe same direction that you may beabout to crash into, it can provide aboost to braking or automaticallybrake the vehicle. This can help avoidor lessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear.

See Forward Automatic Braking (FAB)0 238.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signal inthat direction. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW) alertas the lane marking is crossed. Thesystem will not assist or alert if itdetects that you are actively steering.

Override LKA by turning the steeringwheel. LKA uses a camera to detectlane markings between 60 km/h (37mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph).

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)0 241 and Lane Keep Assist (LKA)0 241.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding lane change crashesthat occur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas or withvehicles rapidly approaching theseareas from behind. The LCA warningdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside mirror and willflash if the turn signal is on. The SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) system isincluded as part of the LCA system.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) 0 239and Lane Change Alert (LCA) 0 239.


IN BRIEF 23

Surround VisionIf equipped, views around the vehicledisplay in the infotainment display toaid with parking and low-speedmaneuvers.

See “Surround Vision” underAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 229.

Front Vision Camera

If equipped, a view of the area in frontof the vehicle displays on theinfotainment display to aid withparking and low-speed maneuvers.

See “Front Vision Camera” underAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 229.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)If equipped, RVC shows a view of thearea behind the vehicle on theinfotainment display when the vehicleis shifted into R (Reverse) to aid withparking and low-speed backingmaneuvers.

See Assistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 229.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) SystemIf equipped, the RCTA system uses atriangle with an arrow on theinfotainment display to warn of trafficbehind your vehicle that may crossyour vehicle's path while inR (Reverse). In addition, beeps willsound, or the driver seat will pulse.


Parking AssistIf equipped, Front and Rear ParkingAssist (FRPA) uses sensors on thefront and rear bumpers to assist withparking and avoiding objects duringlow speed parking maneuvers.It operates at speeds less than 8 km/h(5 mph). FRPA may display a warningtriangle on the Rear Vision Camerascreen and a graphic on theinstrument cluster to provide theobject distance. In addition, multiplebeeps or seat pulses may occur if veryclose to an object.

The vehicle may also have a higherspeed Backing Warning System andthe Reverse Automatic Brakingsystem.

See Driver Assistance Systems 0 228.

Automatic ParkingAssist (APA)If equipped, the APA system helps tosearch for and maneuver the vehicleinto parallel or perpendicular parkingspots using automatic steering,displays, and beeps. When the vehiclespeed is below 30 km/h (18 mph),touchO to enable the system.

See “Automatic Parking Assist (APA)”under Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing 0 229.

Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB)If the vehicle has Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) it also has the RABsystem, which is designed to helpavoid or reduce the harm caused bybacking crashes when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse). If the system


24 IN BRIEF

detects the vehicle is backing too fastto avoid a crash with a detected objectbehind your vehicle in your path, itmay automatically brake hard toa stop.


Power Outlets

Power Outlets 12 Volt DirectCurrent

Accessory power outlets can be usedto plug in electrical equipment, suchas a cell phone, MP3 player, etc.

The vehicle has five accessory poweroutlets:

. One near the cupholders on thecenter console

. One inside the center console

. One on the rear of the centerconsole

. One in the third row seat on thedriver side

. One in the rear cargo area on thepassenger side

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

See Power Outlets 0 124.

Universal Remote System

If equipped with the Universal Remotesystem, these buttons will be in thefront overhead console.

This system provides a way to replaceup to three remote controltransmitters used to activate devicessuch as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home automationdevices.

See Universal Remote System 0 158.

Sunroof

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

If equipped, the sunroof only operateswhen the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 199.

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fully pressand release I (1). Press the switchagain to stop the movement. To


IN BRIEF 25

express-close the sunroof, fully pressand releaseK (1). Press the switchagain to stop the movement.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : Toopen the sunroof, press and hold I(1). Release the switch to stop themovement. Press and holdK (1) toclose the sunroof. Release the switchto stop the movement.

Tilt Switch

Vent : From the closed position, pressJ (2) to vent the sunroof. PressK(2) to close the sunroof vent.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise. Theair deflector will retract when thesunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theautomatic reversal feature will detectthe object and stop the sunroof.

See Sunroof 0 56.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/ElectronicStability ControlThe vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spinand the StabiliTrak system that assistswith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. Bothsystems come on automatically whenthe vehicle is started and beginsto move.

. To turn off TCS, press and releaseg on the center stack. Thetraction off light i displays in theinstrument cluster. Theappropriate Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message displays.

. To turn off both TCS andStabiliTrak, press and hold g untili and g illuminate in theinstrument cluster and theappropriate DIC message displays.

. Press and release g again to turnon both systems.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

See Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 214.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss in pressureof one of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop as soonas possible and inflate the tires to therecommended pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 189. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.


26 IN BRIEF

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that the tirepressures are getting low and the tiresneed to be inflated to the properpressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 301.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure. See “Tire Fill Alert (IfEquipped)” under Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 302.

Fuel

Premium Recommended Fuel

Use premium 93 octane unleadedgasoline in your vehicle. Unleadedgasoline with an octane rating as lowas 87 may be used, but it will reduceperformance and fuel economy. SeeFuel 0 243.

E85 or FlexFuel

No E85 or FlexFuel

Gasoline-ethanol fuel blends greaterthan E15 (15% ethanol by volume),such as E85, cannot be used in thisvehicle.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is time tochange the engine oil and filter. Theoil life system should be reset to 100%only following an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Using the DIC controls on theright side of the steering wheel,display OIL LIFE on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 143. When remaining oil life islow, the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message will appear onthe display.

2. Press and hold SEL on the DICcontrols for a few seconds toclear the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message and reset the oillife at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.


IN BRIEF 27

The oil life system can also be reset asfollows:

1. Display OIL LIFE on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 143.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 265.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuel mileage.Here are some driving tips to get thebest fuel economy possible.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoid abruptstops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speed limitsor drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires with thesame TPC Spec number moldedinto the tire's sidewall nearthe size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-800-224-1400

Canada: 1-800-882-1112

TTY Users (U.S. Only): 1-888-889-2438

New Cadillac owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside ServiceProgram.

See Roadside Service 0 360.


28 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 51Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle with aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the RKE transmitterin the vehicle, and children orothers could be caught in the pathof a closing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with an RKEtransmitter.


KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 29

The key is used for the driver door.

The transmitter has a button on theside used to remove the key. Do notpull the key out without pressing thebutton.

See your dealer if a replacement keyor additional key is needed.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Service 0 360.

With an active OnStar service plan, anOnStar Advisor may remotely unlockthe vehicle. See OnStar Overview 0 369.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 365.

If there is a decrease in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) operating range:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be blocking thesignal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see your dealeror a qualified technician forservice.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allows forvehicle entry when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft). See “Keyless AccessOperation” later in this section.

The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.



Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System0 29.

/ : If equipped, press and release Q,then immediately press and hold /until the turn signals flash or for atleast four seconds. The engine may bestarted from outside the vehicle usingthe RKE transmitter. See RemoteVehicle Start 0 36.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

If enabled, the turn signal lamps flashonce on the second press to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabled, the

horn chirps when Q is pressed againwithin three seconds. See VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all door will lock and thenthe driver door will immediatelyunlock, if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 150. If the passengerdoor is open when Q is pressed, alldoors lock.

If the passenger door is open when Qis pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.See Vehicle Alarm System 0 46.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding Q forone second will fold the mirrors,if enabled. See Vehicle Personalization0 150.

K : Press once to unlock only thedriver door. If K is pressed againwithin three seconds, all remainingdoors unlock. The interior lamps maycome on and stay on for 20 seconds oruntil the ignition is turned on.

If enabled, the turn signal lamps flashtwice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. If enabled, the exteriorlamps may turn on. See VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the alarm system. See VehicleAlarm System 0 46.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding K forone second will unfold the mirrors,if enabled. See Vehicle Personalization0 150.

Press and hold K until the windowsfully open, if remote windowoperation is emabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

c : Press twice to open the liftglass.

b : Press twice to open or close theliftgate. Press once to stop the liftgatefrom moving.

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locator. The turn signal lampsflash and the horn sounds three times.



Press and hold 7 for more thanthree seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns off whenthe ignition is turned on or 7 ispressed again. The ignition must beoff for the panic alarm to work.

Keyless Access Operation

The Keyless Access system allows forthe doors and liftgate to be accessedwithout pressing the RKE transmitterbutton. The RKE transmitter must bewithin 1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate or doorbeing opened. If the vehicle has thisfeature, there will be a button on theoutside door handles.

Keyless Access can be programmed tounlock all doors on the first lock/unlock press from the driver door. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 150.

If equipped with memory seats, RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 are linked toseating positions of memory 1 or 2.See Memory Seats 0 63.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from theDriver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the lock/unlock button is pressedagain within five seconds, allpassenger doors and the liftgate willunlock.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger Similar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. It has been more than five secondssince the first lock/unlock buttonpress.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has been openedand all doors are now closed.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from thePassenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on a passenger doorhandle will unlock all doors. Pressingthe lock/unlock button will cause alldoors to lock if any of the followingoccur:

. The lock/unlock button was usedto unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has been openedand all doors are now closed.

Passive Locking

Keyless Access will lock the vehicleseveral seconds after all doors areclosed, if the vehicle is off and at least



one RKE transmitter has beenremoved from the interior, or noneremain in the interior.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, the doorsmay lock with the RKE transmitterinside the vehicle. Do not leave theRKE transmitter in an unattendedvehicle.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,Start” under Vehicle Personalization0 150.

Temporarily Disable of PassiveLocking Feature

Temporarily disable passive locking bypressing and holding K on theinterior door switch with a door openfor at least four seconds, or until threechimes are heard. Passive locking willthen remain disabled until Q on theinterior door is pressed, or until thevehicle is turned on.

Remote Left In Vehicle Alert

When the vehicle is turned off and anRKE transmitter is left in the vehicle,the horn will chirp three times afterall doors are closed. To turn on or offsee Vehicle Personalization 0 150.

Remote No Longer in Vehicle Alert

If the vehicle is on, with a door open,and then all doors are closed, thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is not detected, the DICwill display NO REMOTE DETECTEDand the horn will chirp three times.This occurs only once each time thevehicle is driven. To turn on or off seeVehicle Personalization 0 150.

Keyless Liftgate Opening

Press the touch pad on the rear of theliftgate above the license plate to openthe liftgate when all doors areunlocked or when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft).

Keyless Liftglass Opening

Press the exterior liftglass button toopen the liftglass when all doors areunlocked or when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft).

Key Access

To access a vehicle with a deadtransmitter battery, see Door Locks0 37.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmed tothe vehicle will work. If a transmitteris lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmed throughyour dealer. The vehicle can bereprogrammed so that lost or stolentransmitters no longer work. Eachvehicle can have up to eighttransmitters matched to it.

Programming with RecognizedTransmitters

A new transmitter can be programmedto the vehicle when there are tworecognized transmitters.



To program, the vehicle must be offand all transmitters, both currentlyrecognized and new, must bewith you.

1. Remove the key from therecognized transmitter.

2. Place the two recognizedtransmitters in the cupholder oron the passenger seat.

3. Remove the key lock cylinder capon the driver door handle. SeeDoor Locks 0 37. Insert thevehicle key into the key lockcylinder on the driver doorhandle; then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition five times within10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4, ETC.

4. Open the center console storagearea and the storage tray.

5. Place the new transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert, infront of the center consolestorage area.

6. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter is learned,the DIC display will show that itis ready to program the nexttransmitter.

7. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket/insert andpress K or Q on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–7.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

8. Put the key back into thetransmitter.

Programming without RecognizedTransmitters

If two currently recognizedtransmitters are not available, followthis procedure to program up to eighttransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutes tocomplete. The vehicle must be off andall transmitters to be programmedmust be with you.

1. Remove the vehicle key from thetransmitter.

2. Remove the key lock cylinder capon the driver door handle. SeeDoor Locks 0 37. Insert thevehicle key into the key lockcylinder on the driver doorhandle; then turn the key



counterclockwise, to the unlockposition, five times within10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

3. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARN,then press ENGINESTART/STOP.

The DIC display will again showREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

4. Repeat Step 3 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during the nextsteps.

The DIC display should nowshow READY FOR REMOTE # 1.

5. Place the new transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert, infront of the center consolestorage area. The storage areawill need to be opened to accessthe transmitter pocket/insert.

6. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter is learned,the DIC display will show that itis ready to program the nexttransmitter.

7. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket/insert andpress K or Q on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 5–7.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

8. Return the key back into thetransmitter.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEY WASDETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE when startingthe vehicle.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center console storagearea and the storage tray.



2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral) press the brake pedaland ENGINE START/STOP.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Caution

When replacing the battery, do nottouch any of the circuitry on thetransmitter. Static from your bodycould damage the transmitter.

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEY messagedisplays in the DIC.

1. Press the button on the side ofthe transmitter near the bottomand pull the key out.

2. Separate the two halves of thetransmitter using a flat toolinserted into the bottom centerof the transmitter. Do not usethe key slot.



3. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

4. Insert the new battery on theback housing, positive side facingdown. Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Align the front and back housingthen snap the transmittertogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThe climate control system will comeon when the vehicle is startedremotely depending on the outsidetemperature.

The rear defog and heated and cooledseats, if equipped, may also come on.See Heated and Cooled Front Seats 0 66and Vehicle Personalization 0 150.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting ofvehicles.

Do not use remote start if the vehicleis low on fuel.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if:

. The transmitter is in the vehicle.

. The hood is not closed.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction and themalfunction indicator lamp is on.

The engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if:

. The coolant temperature getstoo high.

. The oil pressure gets low.

The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System0 29 or Vehicle Personalization 0 150.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flashor for at least four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on. Thedoors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. RepeatSteps 1 and 2 for one 10-minutetime extension.

Turn the ignition on to operate thevehicle.



Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can be extendedby 10 minutes, for a total of20 minutes, if during the first10 minutes Steps 1 and 2 are repeatedwhile the engine is still running. Anextension can be requested30 seconds after starting.

A maximum of two remote starts, or asingle start with an extension, isallowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must be turnedon and then back off to use remotestart again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the ignition on and then off.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The doors can beunlocked and opened whilethe vehicle is moving. Thechance of being thrown out ofthe vehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors are notlocked. So, all passengersshould wear seat beltsproperly and the doors shouldbe locked whenever thevehicle is driven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on a power doorlock switch.

. Push down the manual lock knobon the driver door to lock alldoors. Push down the lock knobon a passenger door to lock thatdoor only.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock that door. Pull the handleagain to unlatch it.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the RKEtransmitter



. Use the key in the front doors. Thekey cylinder is covered by a cap.See “Driver Door Key LockCylinder Access” later in thissection.

Keyless Access

The RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate or door beingopened. Press the button on the doorhandle to open. See “Keyless AccessOperation” in Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 29.

Driver Door Key Lock CylinderAccess (Slotted Cap Access) (InCase of Dead Battery)

To access the driver door key lockcylinder:

1. Pull the door handle (1) to theopen position and hold it openuntil cap installation is complete.

2. Insert the key (4) into theslot (3) on the bottom of thecap (2) and lift the key upward.

3. Remove the cap (2).

4. Use the key (4) in the cylinder.



To replace the slotted cap:

1. Position the bottom edge of thecap under the lower edge of themetal piece (6). The tabs (7)attach to metal piece (6) at thepositions (5).

2. Rotate the cap upward to installinto place.

3. Check that the cap is secure.

4. Release the door handle.

Free-Turning Locks

The door key lock cylinder turns freelywhen either the wrong key is used,or the correct key is not fully inserted.The free turning door lock featureprevents the lock from being forcedopen. To reset the lock, turn it to thevertical position with the correct keyfully inserted. Remove the key andinsert it again. If this does not resetthe lock, turn the key halfway aroundin the cylinder and repeat the resetprocedure.

Power Door Locks

Press Q or K on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 29.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking of thedoors until five seconds after all doorsare closed.

Delayed locking can only be turned onwhen the Unlocked Door Anti-Lockoutfeature has been turned off.

When Q is pressed on the power doorlock switch while a door or the liftgateis open, a chime will sound threetimes indicating delayed locking isactive.

The doors will lock automaticallyfive seconds after all doors are closed.If a door is reopened before that time,the five-second timer will reset whenall doors are closed again.

Press Q on the door lock switch again

or press Q on the RKE transmitter tolock doors immediately.

This feature can also be programmed.See Vehicle Personalization 0 150.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen all doors are closed, the ignitionis on, and the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).



If a vehicle door is unlocked and thenopened and closed, the doors will lockeither when your foot is removed fromthe brake or the vehicle speedbecomes faster than 13 km/h (8 mph).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on the power door lockswitch.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).

Automatic door locking cannot bedisabled. Automatic door unlockingcan be programmed. See VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

Lockout ProtectionIf the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY and the power door lockswitch is pressed with the driver dooropen, all the doors will lock and onlythe driver door will unlock.

If the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open, whenall doors are closed the vehicle willcheck for RKE transmitters inside.If an RKE transmitter is detected andthe number of RKE transmitters inside

has not reduced, the driver door willunlock and the horn will chirp threetimes.

Lockout Protection can be manuallyoverridden with the driver door openby pressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout isturned on and the vehicle is off, thedriver door is open, and locking isrequested, all the doors will lock andthe driver door will remain open.Press the button again to lock thedriver door. The Unlocked DoorAnti-Lockout feature can be turned onor off. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 150.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Press { to activate the safety locks onthe rear doors. The indicator lightcomes on when activated.

Press { again to deactivate the safetylocks.



Doors

Liftgate

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter the vehicleif it is driven with the liftgate ortrunk/hatch open, or with anyobjects that pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness andeven death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust 0 201.

Caution

To avoid damage to the liftgate orliftgate glass, make sure the areaabove and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.

Power Liftgate Operation

{ Warning

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Caution

Driving with an open andunsecured liftgate may result indamage to the power liftgatecomponents.

The switch is on the overhead console.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

The modes are:

MAX : Opens to maximum height.

3/4 : Opens to a reduced height thatcan be set from 3/4 to fully open. Useto prevent the liftgate from openinginto overhead objects such as a garage



door or roof-mounted cargo. Theliftgate can be opened all the waymanually.

OFF : Opens manually only.

To open or close the liftgate, selectMAX or 3/4 mode and then:

. Pressb twice quickly on the RKEtransmitter until the liftgatemoves.

. Press8 on the overheadconsole. The driver door must beunlocked.

. Press the touch pad on theunderside of the liftgate handleafter unlocking all doors. A lockedvehicle can be opened if the RKEtransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe touch pad.

. Pressl on the bottom edge ofthe liftgate next to the latch toclose.

Press any liftgate button, the touchpad, orb on the RKE transmitterwhile the liftgate is moving to stop it.Pressing any liftgate button orpressingb twice quickly on the RKEtransmitter restarts the operation inthe reverse direction. Pressing thetouch pad on the liftgate handle willrestart the motion, but only in theopening direction.

Caution

Manually forcing the liftgate toopen or close during a power cyclecan damage the vehicle. Allow thepower cycle to complete.

The power liftgate may be temporarilydisabled in extremely lowtemperatures, or after repeated powercycling over a short period of time.If this occurs, the liftgate can still beoperated manually. Select OFF on theliftgate switch.

If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)while the power function is inprogress, the liftgate will continue tocompletion. If the vehicle isaccelerated before the liftgate hascompleted moving, the liftgate maystop or reverse direction. Check forDriver Information Center (DIC)messages and make sure the liftgate isclosed and latched before driving.

Falling Liftgate Detection

If the power liftgate automaticallycloses after a power opening cycle, itindicates that the system is reacting



to excess weight on the liftgate or apossible support strut failure. Removeany excess weight. If the liftgatecontinues to automatically close afteropening, see your dealer for servicebefore using the power liftgate.

Interfering with the power liftgatemotion or manually closing theliftgate too quickly after poweropening may resemble a support strutfailure. This could also activate thefalling liftgate detection feature. Allowthe liftgate to complete its operationand wait a few seconds beforemanually closing the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,the liftgate will automatically reversedirection and move a short distanceaway from the obstacle. Afterremoving the obstruction, the powerliftgate operation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.After removing the obstructions,

manually close the liftgate. This willallow normal power operationfunctions to resume.

If the vehicle is locked while theliftgate is closing, and an obstacleprevents the liftgate from completelyclosing, the horn will sound as analert that the liftgate did not close.

Pinch sensors are on the side edges ofthe liftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the vehicleand presses against a sensor, theliftgate will reverse direction and stopat a partially open position. Theliftgate will remain open until it isactivated again or closed manually.

Setting the 3/4 Mode

To change the position the liftgatestops at when opening:

1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode andopen the liftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate button. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifneeded.

3. Press and holdl on thebottom edge of the liftgate nextto the latch on the outside of theliftgate until the turn signalsflash and a beep sounds. Thisindicates the setting has beenrecorded.

The liftgate cannot be set below aminimum programmable height.If there is no light flash or sound,then the height adjustment may betoo low.

Manual Operation

Select OFF to manually operate theliftgate.

Caution

Attempting to move the liftgate tooquickly and with excessive forcemay result in damage to thevehicle.

Operate the liftgate manually with asmooth motion and moderate speed.The system includes a feature whichlimits the manual closing speed toprotect the components.



To open the liftgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press K onthe RKE transmitter twice to unlockall doors. Press the touch pad (1) onthe underside of the liftgate handleand lift up.

Press the button (2) above the licenseplate to open the liftglass, or pressctwice quickly on the RKE transmitter.Do not leave the liftglass open whenraising the liftgate.

There will be a delay in the release ofthe liftglass if there is an attempt toopen it while the rear wiper is inmotion.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. This willcause the liftgate to be unlatched.

The RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate toautomatically unlock it. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 29.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will not open.The liftgate will resume operationwhen the battery is reconnected andcharged.

Hands-Free Operation

The liftgate may be operated with akicking motion under the rear bumper.

The liftgate will not operate if the RKEtransmitter is not within 1 m (3 ft).

The hands-free feature will not workwhile the liftgate is moving. To stopthe liftgate while in motion use one ofthe liftgate switches.

Length of Kick Zone

To operate, move your foot in aforward kicking motion under thecenter of the rear bumper, then pullit back.



Caution

Splashing water may cause theliftgate to open. Keep the RKEtransmitter away from the rearbumper detection area or turn theliftgate mode to OFF when cleaningor working near the rear bumper toavoid accidental opening.

. Do not sweep your foot sideto side.

. Do not keep your foot under thebumper; the liftgate will notactivate.

. Do not touch the liftgate until ithas stopped moving.

. This feature may be temporarilydisabled under some conditions.If the liftgate does not respond tothe kick, open or close the liftgateby another method or start thevehicle. The feature will bere-enabled.

When closing the liftgate using thisfeature, there will be a short delay.The rear lights will flash and a chimewill sound. Step away from the liftgatebefore it starts moving.

Power Assist Steps

{ Warning

Never place hands or other bodyparts between the deployed powerassist steps and the vehicle. You orothers could be seriously injured.

{ Warning

Never step on a moving assist step.You or others could be seriouslyinjured.

Disable the assist steps before jackingor placing any object under thevehicle.

Too much ice buildup may preventdeployment of the power assist steps.Check the step position before exitingthe vehicle. If this happens, disablethe power assist steps, clear the ice,then enable the assist steps andconfirm normal function prior to use.

Keep hands, children, pets, objects,and clothing clear of the power assiststeps when in motion. The steps willreverse direction if they encounter anobstruction when opening or closing.Remove the obstruction, then openand close the door on the same sideto complete the motion of the assiststeps. If the obstruction is not cleared,the assist steps remain extended whiledriving.

To change the settings:

1. TouchF.

2. Touch Running Boards icon.

The options are:

OFF : Disables the power assist steps,so they will not deploy.



ON : Power assist steps will deploywhen a door is opened. When a dooris closed the assist steps willautomatically retract afterthree seconds.

Extended : Keeps the steps deployedwhen the vehicle is in P (Park) orN (Neutral). This setting may be usedwhen cleaning the steps.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm System

The indicator light, on the instrumentpanel near the windshield, indicatesthe status of the system.

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid : Vehicle is secured duringthe delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the liftgate or the hoodis open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system is armed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. Use the Keyless Accesssystem.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds, the alarmsystem will arm and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will not armif the doors are locked with the key.



If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is not started,or the door is not unlocked bypressing K on the RKE transmitterduring the 10-second pre-alarm, thealarm will be activated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, the liftgate, or thehood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have exited.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter, or use theKeyless Access system.

Unlocking the driver door with thekey will not disarm the system orturn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.

Power Sounder, InclinationSensor and Intrusion Sensor

In addition to the standardtheft-deterrent system features, thissystem may also have a powersounder, inclination sensor andintrusion sensor.

The power sounder provides anaudible alarm which is distinct fromthe vehicle’s horn. It has its ownpower source, and can sound an alarmif the vehicle’s battery iscompromised.

The inclination sensor can set off thealarm if it senses movement of thevehicle, such as a change in vehicleorientation.

The intrusion sensor monitors thevehicle interior, and can activate thealarm if it senses unauthorized entryinto the vehicle’s interior. Do notallow passengers or pets to remain inthe vehicle when the intrusion sensoris activated.

Before arming the theft-deterrentsystem and activating the intrusionsensor:

. Make sure all doors and windowsare completely closed.

. Secure any loose items such assunshades.

. Make sure there are noobstructions blocking the sensorsin the front overhead console.



. Close DVD screens before leavingthe vehicle.

Inclination and IntrusionSensors Disable Switch

It is recommended that the intrusionand inclination sensors be deactivatedif pets are left in the vehicle or thevehicle is being transported.

With the vehicle turned off, pressoin the front overhead console. Theindicator light will come onmomentarily, indicating that thesesensors have been disabled for thenext alarm system arming cycle.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 365.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition is on anda valid transmitter is found in thevehicle.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is a problemwith arming or disarming thetheft-deterrent system.

The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start thevehicle.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn thevehicle off and try again.

If the RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter orplace the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert next to thecenter console storage area betweenthe driver and front passenger seats.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 29.

If the engine does not start with theother transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the pocket/insert, thevehicle needs service. See your dealerwho can service the theft-deterrentsystem and have a new transmitterprogrammed to the vehicle.



Do not leave the transmitter or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If you cuttoo sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on the right.Check the inside mirror or glanceover your shoulder before changinglanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen from thedriver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.The indicator light comes on.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.

3. Adjust the outside mirror so thatthe side of the vehicle and thearea behind are seen.

4. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror. The indicatorlight goes off.



Exterior Automatic DimmingMirror

If equipped, the driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofheadlamps behind. This feature comeson when the vehicle is started. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirror0 51.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle may have a turn signalindicator on the mirrors that flashesin the direction of the turn or lanechange.

Folding Mirrors

Power Folding

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:

. The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while folding.

. They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

. The mirrors will not stay in theunfolded position.

. The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heard duringthe resetting of the power foldingmirrors. This sound is normal after amanual folding operation.

Auto Mirror Folding

If equipped, with the ignition off,press and hold Q on the RKEtransmitter for approximatelyone second to automatically fold theexterior mirrors. Press and hold K onthe RKE transmitter for approximatelyone second to unfold. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 29.

This feature is turned on or offthrough vehicle personalization. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 150.



Heated MirrorsK : Press to heat the outside mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate Control System0 170.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tilts toa preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). This allowsthe curb to be seen when parallelparking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:

. The vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about 30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalization 0 150.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind your vehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, there may bethree buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how tosubscribe to OnStar. See OnStarOverview 0 369.

To avoid accidental OnStar calls, cleanthe mirror with the ignition off. Donot spray glass cleaner directly on themirror. Use a soft towel dampenedwith water.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe rearview mirror automaticallydims to reduce the glare of theheadlamps from behind. This featurecomes on when the vehicle is started.

Rear Camera MirrorIf equipped, this automatic dimmingmirror provides a wide angle cameraview of the area behind the vehicle.

Pull the tab rearward to turn on thedisplay. Push the tab forward to turnit off. When off, the mirror isautomatic dimming. Adjust the mirrorfor a clear view of the area behind thevehicle while the display is off.



To adjust the brightness, press thebutton (1) on the back of the rearviewmirror without covering the lightsensor (2).

Each button press cycles thebrightness between five settings.

{ Warning

The Rear Camera Mirror (RCM) hasa limited view. Portions of the road,vehicles, and other objects may notbe seen. Do not drive or park thevehicle using only this camera.Objects may appear closer thanthey are. Check the outside mirrorsor glance over your shoulder whenmaking lane changes or merging.Failure to use proper care mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage.

The camera that provides the RearCamera Mirror (RCM) image is abovethe license plate, next to the RearVision Camera (RVC).

To clean the rear camera, see RearWindow Wiper/Washer 0 122.

Troubleshooting

If the tab is in the rearward positionand a blue screen and d are displayedin the mirror and the display shutsoff, see your dealer for service.



The RCM may not work properly ordisplay a clear image if:

. There is glare from the sun orheadlamps. This may obstructobjects from view.

. Dirt, snow, or other debris blocksthe camera lens. Clean the lenswith a soft damp cloth.

. The back of the vehicle has beendamaged and the position andmounting angle of the camera haschanged.

Child-View Mirror

If equipped, the child-view mirror ison the overhead console. Press thefixed button on the cover to release.Push the mirror back up when notin use.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helpless adult,or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closedin warm or hot weather. They canbe overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries oreven death from heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rear



window is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce the sound,open either a front window or thesunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriously injuredor killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Never leave theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter in a vehicle withchildren. When there are children inthe rear seat, use the windowlockout switch to prevent operationof the windows. See Keys 0 28.

Power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 199.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Window Lockout

This feature stops the rear passengerwindow switches from working.

. PressZ to engage the rearwindow lockout feature. Theindicator light is on when engaged.

. PressZ again to disengage.

Window Express Movement

All windows can be opened withoutholding the window switch. Press theswitch down fully and quickly releaseto express open the window.

If equipped, pull the window switchup fully and quickly release to expressclose the window.

Briefly press or pull the windowswitch in the same direction to stopthat window’s express movement.



Window Automatic ReversalSystem

The express-close feature will reversewindow movement if it comes incontact with an object. Extreme coldor ice could cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will operatenormally after the object or conditionis removed.

Automatic Reversal SystemOverride

{ Warning

If automatic reversal systemoverride is active, the window willnot reverse automatically. You orothers could be injured and thewindow could be damaged. Beforeusing automatic reversal systemoverride, make sure that all peopleand obstructions are clear of thewindow path.

When the engine is on, override theautomatic reversal system by pullingand holding the window switch ifconditions prevent it from closing.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming may be necessary if thevehicle battery has been disconnectedor discharged. If the window is unableto express-up, program eachexpress-close window:

1. Close all doors.

2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Partially open the window to beprogrammed. Then close it andcontinue to pull the switchbriefly after the window has fullyclosed.

4. Open the window and continueto press the switch briefly afterthe window has fully opened.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to block glare.Detach the sun visor from the centermount to pivot to the side windowand, if equipped, extend along the rod.



Roof

Sunroof

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

If equipped, the sunroof only operateswhen the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 199.

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fully pressand release I (1). Press the switch

again to stop the movement. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fully pressand releaseK (1). Press the switchagain to stop the movement.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : Toopen the sunroof, press and hold I(1). Release the switch to stop themovement. Press and holdK (1) toclose the sunroof. Release the switchto stop the movement.

Tilt Switch

Vent : From the closed position, pressJ (2) to vent the sunroof. PressK(2) to close the sunroof vent.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise. Theair deflector will retract when thesunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually when thesunroof is in the vent or fully closedposition.

Automatic Reversal System

The sunroof has an automatic reversalsystem that is only active when thesunroof is operated inexpress-close mode.

If an object is in the path whileexpress closing, the reversal systemwill detect an object, stop, and openthe sunroof again.

If frost or other conditions preventclosing, override the feature by closingthe sunroof in manual mode. To stopmovement, release the switch.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof and



remove any obstacles or loose debris.Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealingarea using a clean cloth, mild soap,and water. Do not remove grease fromthe sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this is normal.


58 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS

Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 60Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Heated and Cooled Front Seats . . . 66

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Seat BeltsSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Replacing Seat Belt System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . 85When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . 88How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . 88What Will You See after an AirbagInflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . 90Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . 94

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Infants and Young Children . . . . . . 97Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 99Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 101Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . . . 102

Replacing LATCH System PartsAfter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theRear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theFront Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112


SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 59

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not drive untilthe head restraints for all occupantsare installed and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraint upto raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it is lockedin place.

To lower the head restraint, press thebutton, located on the top of theseatback, and push the head restraintdown. Try to move the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.



Second Row Seats

The vehicle's second row seats havehead restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The second row seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Third Row Seats

The third row seat head restraint canbe lowered to allow for better visibilitywhen the rear seat is unoccupied.

To lower the head restraint, press thebutton located on the top of theseatback and push the headrestraint down.

Return the lowered head restraint tothe upright position until it locks intoplace. Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure it is locked.

If you are installing a child restraintin the third row seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 102.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment


{ Warning

You can lose control of the vehicleif you try to adjust a driver seatwhile the vehicle is moving. Adjustthe driver seat only when thevehicle is not moving.




Uplevel Seat Control

1. Feature Select2. Up3. Rearward4. Down5. Forward

. Move Feature Select (1) to displayseat adjustments on theinfotainment display. Press andrelease or hold to scroll throughfeatures.

. Press Up (2) to make upwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Rearward (3) to makerearward adjustments of theselected feature.

. Press Down (4) to make downwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Forward (5) to make forwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.


To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front part of theseat cushion by moving the frontof the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat by movingthe rear of the control up or down.

Lumbar Adjustment

Lumbar and Bolster Support


To adjust lumbar support:

. Press and hold the control forwardto increase or rearward to decreaseupper and lower lumbar supportat the same time.



. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.


To adjust lumbar support, if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to lumbarsupport on the infotainmentdisplay.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust lumbar forward orrearward.

. Press Up (2) or Down (4) to adjustlumbar up or down.

To adjust bolster support, if equipped:


. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to bolstersupport on the infotainmentdisplay.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust bolster support inward oroutward.

Upper Shoulder Support

To adjust upper shoulder support,if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to uppershoulder support on theinfotainment display.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust shoulder support forwardor rearward.



Reclining Seatbacks

Base Shown, Uplevel Similar

To recline the seatback:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckled up,the seat belts cannot do their job.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would bethere, not at your pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit well backin the seat and wear the seat beltproperly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if thevehicle is moving.

Memory Seats



If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to store and recall their uniqueseat positions for driving the vehicle,and a shared exit position for gettingout of the vehicle. Other featurepositions may also be set, such aspower mirrors, power steering wheel,and adjustable pedals, if equipped.Memory positions are linked to RKEtransmitter 1 or 2 for automaticmemory recalls.

Before storing, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn theignition on and then press and releaseSET; a beep will sound. Thenimmediately press and hold 1, 2,orB (Exit) on the driver door untiltwo beeps sound. To manually recallthese positions, press and hold 1, 2,orB until the saved position isreached.

The vehicle identifies the currentdriver’s RKE transmitter number (1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 29. Only RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 can be used forautomatic memory recalls. A DriverInformation Center (DIC) welcomemessage indicating the transmitter

number may display for the first fewignition cycles following a transmitterchange. For Auto Memory Recall towork properly, save the positions tothe memory button (1 or 2) matchingthe RKE transmitter number displayedin the DIC welcome message. Carrythe linked RKE transmitter whenentering the vehicle.

Vehicle Personalization Settings

. To have the Auto Memory Recallmovement begin when the vehicleis started, select the Settingsmenu, then Vehicle, then Comfortand Convenience, and then AutoMemory Recall. Select On or Off.See “Auto Memory Recall” later inthis section.

. To begin Easy Exit Recallmovement when the ignition isturned off and the driver door isopened, or when the ignition isturned off with the driver dooralready opened, select the Settingsmenu, then Vehicle, then Comfortand Convenience, and then EasyExit Options. Select On or Off. See“Easy Exit Recall” later in thissection.

. See Vehicle Personalization 0 150for additional setting information.

Identifying Driver Number

To identify the driver number:

1. Start the vehicle with the otherkey or RKE transmitter. The DICshould display the drivernumber; 1 or 2. Turn the ignitionoff and remove the key or RKEtransmitter from the vehicle.

2. Start the vehicle with the initialkey or RKE transmitter. The DICshould display the other drivernumber not shown in step 1.

Saving Memory Positions

Read these instructions completelybefore saving memory positions.

To save preferred driving positions1 and 2:


A DIC welcome message may bedisplayed indicating number 1 or2 for memory recalls.



2. Adjust all available memoryfeatures to the desired drivingposition.

3. Press and release SET; a beepwill sound.

4. Immediately press and hold the1 or 2 memory button matchingthe above DIC welcome messageuntil two beeps sound.

If too much time passes betweenreleasing SET and pressing 1, thememory position will not besaved and two beeps will notsound. Repeat Steps 3 and 4.

1 or 2 corresponds to the drivernumber. See “Identifying DriverNumber” in this section.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for a seconddriver using 1 or 2.

To save positions forB and easy exit

features, repeat Steps 1–4 usingB.This stores the positions for gettingout of the vehicle.

Save preferred memory featurepositions to both 1 and 2 if you arethe only driver.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

Press and hold 1, 2, orB to recallthe previously stored memorypositions.

To stop manual recall movement,release 1, 2, or B. Recall can also bestopped by pressing a power seat, SET,power mirror control, power steeringwheel control, or adjustable pedalcontrol, if memory equipped. Thedriver or passenger side mirror mustbe selected.

Auto Memory Recall

The vehicle identifies the number ofthe current driver’s RKE transmitter(1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 29. If the RKEtransmitter is 1 or 2, and AutoMemory Recall is programmed on invehicle personalization, the positionssaved to the same memory buttonnumber 1 or 2 are automaticallyrecalled when the ignition is turnedon, or turned from off to ACC/ACCESSORY. RKE transmitters 3–8will not provide automatic memoryrecalls.

To turn Auto Memory Recall on or off,see "Vehicle Personalization Settings"previously in this section and VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

The transmission must be in P (Park)to initiate Auto Memory Recall. AutoMemory Recall will complete if thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park) priorto reaching the stored memoryposition.

To stop Auto Memory Recallmovement, turn the ignition off orpress any of the following memorycontrols:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB

. Power mirror, with the driver orpassenger side mirror selected

. Power steering wheel, if equipped

. Adjustable pedals, if equipped

If the stored memory seat positiondoes not automatically recall or recallsto the wrong positions, the driver’sRKE transmitter number (1 or 2) maynot match the memory buttonnumber that positions were saved to.



Try storing the position to the othermemory button or try the other RKEtransmitter.

Easy Exit Recall

Easy Exit Recall is not linked to anRKE transmitter. The position storedtoB is used for all drivers. To turnEasy Exit Recall on or off, see "VehiclePersonalization Settings" previously inthis section and Vehicle Personalization0 150.

If turned on, the positions saved toB are automatically recalled whenone of the following occurs:

. The vehicle is turned off and thedriver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

To stop Easy Exit Recall movement,press any of the following memorycontrols:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB

. Power mirror, with the driver orpassenger side mirror selected

. Power steering wheel, if equipped

. Adjustable pedals, if equipped

Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or power steering wheelwhile recalling a memory position, therecall may stop. Remove theobstruction and try the recall again.If the memory position still does notrecall, see your dealer for service.

Massage

Driver Seat Shown, Passenger SeatSimilar

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use the massage feature.

To activate and adjust massage:

1. Turn the selection control (1) toview massage options on theinfotainment display.

2. Select massage feature.

3. Press up or down to select themassage type.

4. Press forward or rearward tochange the intensity.

5. To activate massage at lastmassage type and intensitysettings or to turn massage off,press the massage On/Offcontrol (2).

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. To reducethe risk of burns, use care whenusing the seat heater, especially forlong periods of time. Do not place

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

anything on the seat that insulatesagainst heat, such as a blanket,cushion, cover, or similar item. Thismay cause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seat heatermay cause a burn or may damagethe seat.

To operate, the engine must berunning.

PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion and seatback.

PressC or { to cool the driver orpassenger seat.

When this feature is off, the heatedand cooled seat symbols on thebuttons are white. When a heated seatis turned on, the symbol turns red.When a cooled seat is turned on, thesymbol turns blue.

Press the button once for the highestsetting. With each press of the button,the seat will change to the next lowersetting, and then to the off setting.The indicator lights next to thebuttons indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest. If theheated seats are on high for anextended time, their level mayautomatically be lowered.

The passenger seat may take longer toheat up.

Remote Start Auto Heated andCooled Seats

During a remote start, the heated orcooled seats will turn on if enabled invehicle personalization. When it is

cold outside, the heated seats turn on;when it is hot outside, the cooledseats turn on. The seats will continueto operate depending on the vehicle'sinternal temperature. If auto heated orcooled seats are not equipped orenabled, seat operation is canceledwhen the ignition is turned on. Pressthe heated or cooled seat button touse the heated or cooled seats afterthe vehicle is started.See Remote Vehicle Start 0 36 andVehicle Personalization 0 150.

The heated or cooled seat indicatorlights do not turn on during a remotestart.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced. Thisis normal.

Auto Heated and Cooled Seats

When the ignition is on, the autoheated or cooled seats willautomatically activate at the leveldetermined by the vehicle's interiortemperature, if enabled in vehiclepersonalization. See VehiclePersonalization 0 150. The indicatorlights next to the buttons indicate thelevel of operation. Use the heated or



cooled seat buttons to turn off autoheated or cooled seats. If thepassenger seat is unoccupied, thisfeature will not activate that seat.

Rear SeatsRear Seat Reminder

If equipped, the message REAR SEATREMINDER LOOK IN REAR SEATdisplays under certain conditionsindicating there may be an item orpassenger in the rear seat. Checkbefore exiting the vehicle.

This feature will activate when asecond row door is opened while thevehicle is on or up to 10 minutesbefore the vehicle is turned on. Therewill be an alert when the vehicle isturned off. The alert does not directlydetect objects in the rear seat; instead,under certain conditions, it detectswhen a rear door is opened andclosed, indicating that there may besomething in the rear seat.

The feature is active only once eachtime the vehicle is turned on and off,and will require reactivation byopening and closing the second rowdoors. There may be an alert evenwhen there is nothing in the rear seat;for example, if a child entered the

vehicle through the rear door and leftthe vehicle without the vehicle beingshut off.

The feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 150.

Heated Rear Seats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. See theWarning under Heated and CooledFront Seats 0 66.



The buttons are on the rear of thecenter console.

With the ignition on, press M or L toheat the left or right outboard seatcushion. An indicator on the rearclimate control display appears whenthis feature is on.

Press the button once for the highestsetting. With each press of the button,the seat will change to the next lowersetting, and then to the off setting.The indicator lights next to thebuttons indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

If the heated seats are on high for anextended time, their level mayautomatically be lowered.

Second Row SeatsThe second row seats can be foldedfor additional cargo space or foldedand tumbled for easy entry and exit tothe third row seat.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to the desiredposition, and then release thelever to lock the seatback inplace.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

1. Lift the lever fully while applyingpressure to the seatback, and theseatback will return to theupright position. If the lever islifted without applying pressure,the seat will release to a foldedposition.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Manual Fold and Tumble Feature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seat ina tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbled seat

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

is not locked. It can move when thevehicle is in motion. People in thevehicle could be injured in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to return theseat to the passenger seatingposition before driving the vehicle.Push and pull on the seat to makesure it is locked into place.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the seatbelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the seatbelts. Always unbuckle the seatbelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or on the seat.

2. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat to release theseatback.

The seatback will fold forward tocreate a flat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat,try moving the front seat forwardand/or put the front seatback inthe upright position.

3. Lift the lever again to release therear of the seat from the floor.The seat will tumble forward.



Folding and Tumbling the Seat fromthe Third Row Seat

{ Warning

Using the third row seating positionwhile the second row is folded,or folded and tumbled, could causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash. Besure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sure itis locked into place.

To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat:


2. Pull the strap on the bottom rearof the second row seat to releasethe seatback. The seatback willfold forward.

3. Pull the strap again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Automatic Fold and TumbleFeature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seat ina tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbled seatis not locked. It can move when thevehicle is in motion. People in thevehicle could be injured in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to return theseat to the passenger seatingposition before driving the vehicle.Push and pull on the seat to makesure it is locked into place.

{ Warning

Automatically folding and tumblingthe seat when someone is sitting inthe seat, could cause injury to the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

person sitting there. Always makesure there is no one sitting in theseat before pressing the automaticseat release switch.

Caution


The transmission must be in P (Park)for this feature to work.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:


Driver Side Rear Panel Switch

2. Press the automatic seat releaseswitch on the panel behind therear doors. The seatbackautomatically folds flat.

3. Press the switch again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Folding and Tumbling the SecondRow Seat from the Cargo Area

1. Second Row Power Seat Foldand Tumble Switches

2. Third Row Power Seat Foldand Raise Switches

To fold and tumble the seat from thecargo area:


2. Press the switch (1) on the sidetrim of the cargo area to fold thesecond row seatback.



The left switch folds the leftseatback, and the right switchfolds the right seatback.

3. Press the switch again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

The switches (2) can be used to foldthe third row seatbacks from thecargo area. See Third Row Seats 0 73.

Returning the Seat to the SittingPosition

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return the seat to the sittingposition from the tumbled position:

1. Pull the seat down until itlatches to the floor. The seatbackcannot be raised if the seat is notlatched to the floor.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked.

3. For the 60/40 split-bench seat,make sure the seat belt in thecenter seating position is notcaught between the two seatsand is not twisted.

Third Row Seats

Folding the Seatback

Caution


The transmission must be in P (Park)for this feature to work.

The third row seatbacks can be foldedto increase cargo space.



To fold the seatback:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the third row seat.




3. Fully lower the head restraints.See Head Restraints 0 59. Put thesecond row seatback in theupright position. See Second RowSeats 0 69.

4. Disconnect the rear seat beltmini-latch, using a key in theslot on the mini-buckle, and letthe belt retract into theheadliner.

5. Stow the mini-latch in the holderin the headliner.

6. Press and hold the switch (2) onthe side trim of the cargo area tofold the third row seatback.

The left switch folds the leftseatback, and the right switchfolds the right seatback.

7. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

The switches (1) can be used to fold orfold and tumble the second row seatsfrom the cargo area. See Second RowSeats 0 69.

Returning the Third RowSeatback to the Upright Position



To return the third row seatback tothe upright position:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the seat.

2. Press and hold the switch (2) onthe side trim of the cargo area toraise the third row seatback.



The left switch raises the leftseatback, and the right switchraises the right seatback.

{ Warning

A seat belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the seat belts are properlyrouted and attached, and are nottwisted.

3. Reconnect the center seat beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle. Donot let it twist.

4. Pull on the seat belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.

5. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

Seat BeltsThis section describes how to use seatbelts properly, and some things notto do.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where a seatbelt cannot be worn properly. In acrash, if you or your passenger(s)are not wearing seat belts, injuriescan be much worse than if you arewearing seat belts. You can beseriously injured or killed by hittingthings inside the vehicle harder orby being ejected from the vehicle.In addition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ride ina cargo area, inside or outside of avehicle. In a collision, passengersriding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed. Do

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

not allow passengers to ride in anyarea of the vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.

Always wear a seat belt, and checkthat all passenger(s) are restrainedproperly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the seat belts. SeeSeat Belt Reminders 0 133.

Why Seat Belts Work



When riding in a vehicle, you travel asfast as the vehicle does. If the vehiclestops suddenly, you keep going untilsomething stops you. It could be thewindshield, the instrument panel,or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you andthe vehicle slow down together. Thereis more time to stop because you stopover a longer distance and, when wornproperly, your strongest bones takethe forces from the seat belts. That iswhy wearing seat belts makes suchgood sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSeat Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing aseat belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a seat belt or not. Yourchance of being conscious duringand after a crash, so you canunbuckle and get out, is muchgreater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear seat belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systemsonly. They work with seat belts—not instead of them. Whether ornot an airbag is provided, alloccupants still have to buckle upto get the most protection.

Also, in nearly all states and in allCanadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing seat belts.

How to Wear Seat BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout seat belts and children, andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see Older Children0 95 or Infants and Young Children0 97. Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearingseat belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a seat belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct buckle foryour seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong



pelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could cause seriousor even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.The shoulder belt locks if there isa sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearing yourseat belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to become looseor twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over an armrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seating positionwith a detachable seat belt, and theseat belt is not attached, see ThirdRow Seats 0 73 for instructions onreconnecting the seat belt to themini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.



Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the frontoutboard seating position mayaffect the passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger SensingSystem 0 90.

For front seating positions, if thewebbing locks in the latch platebefore it reaches the buckle, tiltthe latch plate flat to unlock.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If the latchplate will not go fully into thebuckle, check if the correctbuckle is being used.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see Seat BeltExtender 0 82.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”

in this section for instructions onuse and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

For third row seats, it may benecessary to pull stitching on theseat belt through the latch plateto fully tighten the lap belt onsmaller occupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should returnto its stowed position.

For third row seats, slide the latchplate up the safety webbing when theseat belt is not in use. The latch plateshould rest on the stitching on theseat belt.

Always stow the seat belt slowly. If theseat belt webbing returns quickly tothe stowed position, the retractor maylock and cannot be pulled out. If thishappens, pull the seat belt straight outfirmly to unlock the webbing, andthen release it. If the webbing is stilllocked in the retractor, see yourdealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure theseat belt is out of the way. If a door isslammed against a seat belt, damagecan occur to both the seat belt andthe vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt heightadjuster for the driver and frontoutboard passenger seating positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but not contacting,the neck. Improper shoulder beltheight adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the seat belt in acrash. See How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly 0 76.

Push down on the release button tomove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

Move the adjuster up by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to the desiredposition, try to move it down withoutpushing the release button to makesure it has locked into position.

Automatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem

The vehicle may have the AutomaticSeat Belt Tightening System.



The system activates duringemergency braking and/or suddendriving maneuvers and releases whendriving conditions return to normal.

The system will not activate if theTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl system is not functioningproperly. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 214.If there is a problem with theAutomatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem, a message displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC). If asystem unavailable message displaysrepeatedly or a service messagedisplays, see your dealer. Other seatbelt functions are not affected by theAutomatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has seat beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the seat beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they arepart of the seat belt assembly. Theycan help tighten the seat belts duringthe early stages of a moderate tosevere frontal, near frontal, or rearcrash if the threshold conditions for

pretensioner activation are met. Seatbelt pretensioners can also helptighten the seat belts in a side crashor a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash, thepretensioners and probably otherparts of the vehicle's seat belt systemwill need to be replaced. See ReplacingSeat Belt System Parts after a Crash0 83.

Do not sit on the outboard seat beltwhile entering or exiting the vehicle orat any time while sitting in the seat.Sitting on the seat belt can damagethe webbing and hardware.

Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides

{ Warning

A seat belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

Rear seat belt comfort guides mayprovide added seat belt comfort forolder children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the shoulderbelt away from the neck and head.

Second Row Outboard SeatingPositions

The vehicle has comfort guides for thesecond row outboard seatingpositions. The comfort guides arestored on a clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard seatback.

To install:



1. Remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard seatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt, andinsert the two edges of the beltinto the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be behind thebelt with the plastic guide on thefront.

4. Buckle, position, and release theseat belt as described previouslyin this section. Make sure theshoulder portion of the belt is onthe shoulder and not falling offof it. The belt should be close to,but not contacting, the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edges togetherso that the seat belt can be removedfrom the guide. Slide the guide ontoits storage clip.

Third Row Seating Positions

Comfort guides are available throughyour dealer for third row seatingpositions. Instructions are includedwith the guides.



Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancySeat belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wearseat belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is toprotect the mother. When a seat beltis worn properly, it is more likely that

the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making seat belts effectiveis wearing them properly.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's seat belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a seat belt is not long enough,your dealer will order you an extender.When you go in to order it, take theheaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you.To help avoid personal injury, do notlet someone else use it, and use itonly for the seat it is made to fit. Theextender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing childrestraints. For more information onthe proper use and fit of seat beltextenders see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.

Safety System CheckPeriodically check the seat beltreminder, seat belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors, shoulder belt heightadjusters (if equipped), and seat beltanchorages to make sure they are all

in working order. Look for any otherloose or damaged seat belt systemparts that might keep a seat beltsystem from performing properly. Seeyour dealer to have it repaired. Tornor frayed seat belts may not protectyou in a crash. They can rip apartunder impact forces. If a belt is tornor frayed, have it replacedimmediately.

Make sure the seat belt reminder lightis working. See Seat Belt Reminders0 133.

Keep seat belts clean and dry. See SeatBelt Care 0 82.

Seat Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, they mightnot be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean and rinse seat belt

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

webbing only with mild soap andlukewarm water. Allow the webbingto dry.

Seat belts should be properly cared forand maintained.

Seat belt hardware should be kept dryand free of dust or debris. Asnecessary exterior hard surfaces andseat belt webbing may be lightlycleaned with mild soap and water.Ensure there is not excessive dust ordebris in the mechanism. If dust ordebris exists in the system please seethe dealer. Parts may need to bereplaced to ensure properfunctionality of the system.

Replacing Seat BeltSystem Parts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the seat beltsystem in the vehicle. A damagedseat belt system may not properlyprotect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help make surethe seat belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofseat belts may not be necessary. Butthe seat belt assemblies that wereused during any crash may have beenstressed or damaged. See your dealerto have the seat belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the seat belt systemwas not being used at the time of thecrash.

Have the seat belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicle orwhile you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 134.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the following airbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger

. A front center airbag for the driverand front outboard passenger

. A seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the driver

. A seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the front outboard passenger

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand for the second and third rowpassengers seated directly behindthe driver

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third row passengersseated directly behind the frontoutboard passenger

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a label nearthe deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the center of the steering wheelfor the driver and on the instrumentpanel for the front outboardpassenger.

For the front center airbag, the wordAIRBAG is on the inboard side of thedriver seatback.

For seat-mounted side impact airbags,the word AIRBAG is on the side of theseat closest to the door.

For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by seat belts.Even though today's airbags are alsodesigned to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflatingbag, all airbags must inflate veryquickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things toknow about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your seat belt, even withairbags. Airbags are designed towork with seat belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are not designedto inflate in every crash. In somecrashes seat belts are the onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? 0 87.

Wearing your seat belt during acrash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to theseat belts. Everyone in the vehicleshould wear a seat belt properly,whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.



{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink of aneye, anyone who is up against,or very close to any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to any airbag, as you would beif sitting on the edge of the seat orleaning forward. Seat belts helpkeep you in position before andduring a crash. Always wear a seatbelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The seat belts and thefront outboard passenger airbagsare most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in theseat with both feet on the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the front centerarmrest or console in vehicles witha front center airbag.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 95 orInfants and Young Children 0 97.

There is an airbag readiness light onthe instrument cluster, which showsthe airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 134.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.



The front outboard passenger frontalairbag is in the passenger sideinstrument panel.

The front center airbag is in theinboard side of the driver seatback.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger SideSimilar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted side impactairbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger SideSimilar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, and secondand third row outboard passengers arein the ceiling above the side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, the airbagmight not inflate properly or itmight force the object into thatperson causing severe injury oreven death. The path of an inflatingairbag must be kept clear. Do not

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

put anything between an occupantand an airbag, and do not attach orput anything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any other airbagcovering.

Do not use seat or consoleaccessories that block the inflationpath of a seat-mounted side impactairbag or the front center airbag.

Never secure anything to the roof ofa vehicle with roof-rail airbags byrouting a rope or tie-down throughany door or window opening. If youdo, the path of an inflating roof-railairbag will be blocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped with airbags.See Airbag System 0 84. Airbags aredesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds the specific airbag system'sdeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in time

for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. The vehiclehas electronic sensors that help theairbag system determine the severityof the impact. Deployment thresholdscan vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal crashes to help reduce thepotential for severe injuries, mainly tothe driver's or front outboardpassenger's head and chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed or moving,rigid or deformable, narrow or wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle has advancedtechnology frontal airbags. Advancedtechnology frontal airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

The vehicle also has a seat positionsensor that enables the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat. The seat position sensorprovides information that is used toadjust the deployment of the driverfrontal airbag.

The front center airbag is designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending upon the locationof the impact, when either side of thevehicle is struck. In addition, the frontcenter airbag is designed to inflatewhen the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over on itsside. The front center airbag is notdesigned to inflate in frontal impacts,near frontal impacts, or rear impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes depending on thelocation of the impact. Seat-mountedside impact airbags are not designedto inflate in frontal impacts, nearfrontal impacts, rollovers, or rear



impacts. A seat-mounted side impactairbag is designed to inflate on theside of the vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the location ofthe impact. In addition, these roof-railairbags are designed to inflate duringa rollover or in a severe frontalimpact. Roof-rail airbags are notdesigned to inflate in rear impacts.Both roof-rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck,if the sensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside, or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of the vehicledamage or the repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break out of

the cover. The inflator, the airbag, andrelated hardware are all part of theairbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 85.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contact theinside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by seat belts by distributingthe force of the impact more evenlyover the occupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help contain the head andchest of occupants in the outboardseating positions in the first, second,and third rows. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed to helpreduce the risk of full or partial

ejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarily becausethe occupant's motion is not towardthose airbags. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? 0 87.

Airbags should never be regarded asanything more than a supplement toseat belts.

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates?After frontal and seat-mounted sideimpact airbags inflate, they quicklydeflate, so quickly that some peoplemay not even realize the airbagsinflated. The front center airbag androof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components of theairbag module may be hot for severalminutes. For location of the airbags,see Where Are the Airbags? 0 85.

The parts of the airbag that come intocontact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There may be



some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags.Airbag inflation does not prevent thedriver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer thevehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, there maybe dust in the air. This dust couldcause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma orother breathing trouble. To avoidthis, everyone in the vehicle shouldget out as soon as it is safe to doso. If you have breathing problemsbut cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then getfresh air by opening a window or adoor. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazard

warning flashers, and shut off the fuelsystem after the airbags inflate. Thefeature may also activate, withoutairbag inflation, after an event thatexceeds a predetermined threshold.After turning the ignition off and thenon again, the fuel system will returnto normal operation; the doors can belocked, the interior lamps can beturned off, and the hazard warningflashers can be turned off using thecontrols for those features. If any ofthese systems are damaged in thecrash they may not operate as normal.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflate theairbags may have also damagedimportant functions in the vehicle,such as the fuel system, brake andsteering systems, etc. Even if thevehicle appears to be drivable aftera moderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that could makeit difficult to safely operate thevehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbag inflates,you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do notget them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The servicemanual for the vehicle covers theneed to replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a crash.



See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy 0 367 and Event DataRecorders 0 367.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger Sensing SystemThe vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the front outboardpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will light onthe overhead console when the vehicleis started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol for onor off, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator 0 134.

The passenger sensing system turnsoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. No other airbag is affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system workswith sensors that are part of the frontoutboard passenger seat and seat belt.The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagshould be allowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured in arear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger frontal airbaginflates. This is because the back ofthe rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat is ina forward position.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the passengerfrontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.No one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, even thoughthe airbag is turned off.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If securing aforward-facing child restraint in thefront outboard passenger seat,always move the seat as far back asit will go. It is better to secure childrestraints in the rear seat. Considerusing another vehicle to transportthe child when a rear seat is notavailable.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:

. The front outboard passenger seatis unoccupied.

. The system determines an infantis present in a child restraint.

. A front outboard passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat for aperiod of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or the passengersensing system.

When the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit as areminder that the airbag is off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 134.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sitting properlyin the front outboard passenger seat.

When the passenger sensing systemhas allowed the airbag to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is active.

For some children, including childrenin child restraints, and for very smalladults, the passenger sensing system

may or may not turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,depending upon the person's seatingposture and body build. Everyone inthe vehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a seat beltproperly— whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 134 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infant



is present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installed andthe on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 112or Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)0 110.

Make sure the seat belt retractoris locked by pulling the shoulderbelt all the way out of theretractor when installing thechild restraint, even if the childrestraint is equipped with a seatbelt lock off. When the retractor

lock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 59.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system may ormay not turn off the airbag for a childin a child restraint depending uponthe child’s size. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat. Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in thefront seat, even if the on indicator isnot lit.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:




2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of thebelt is pulled out all the way, thechild restraint locking featurewill be engaged. This mayunintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system to turnthe airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way, andthen buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this positionfor two to three minutes after theon indicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboard passengerseat, if the passenger airbag offindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Seat belts help keep the passenger inposition on the seat during vehiclemaneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbag status.See “Seat Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such as seat

covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system operates.We recommend that you not use seatcovers or other aftermarket equipmentexcept when approved by GM for yourspecific vehicle. See Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 94 formore information about modificationsthat can affect how the systemoperates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or other electronicdevice, is put on an unoccupied seat.If this is not desired, remove theobject from the seat.

{ Warning

Stowing articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.



Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicle shouldbe serviced. There are parts of theairbag system in several places aroundthe vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout servicing the vehicle and theairbag system. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information 0 365.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an airbag can stillinflate during improper service. Youcan be injured if you are close to anairbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They areprobably part of the airbag system.Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure theperson performing work for you isqualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheet metalmay keep the airbag system fromworking properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing anyparts of the front seats, seat belts,airbag sensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrument panel,inner door seals including thespeakers, any of the airbag modules,ceiling or pillar garnish trim, overheadconsole, front sensors, side impactsensors, airbag wiring, or front centerconsole.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the location ofthe airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbag wiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position, whichincludes sensors that are part of thepassenger's seat. The passengersensing system may not operate

properly if the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery, or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery, or trim designedfor a different vehicle. Any object,such as an aftermarket seat heater ora comfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of the seatfabric, could also interfere with theoperation of the passenger sensingsystem. This could either preventproper deployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properly turningoff the passenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System 0 90.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tires andWheels 0 309 for additional importantinformation.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability and youhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicle ismodified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. See CustomerAssistance Offices 0 358.



Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 134.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbag maynot work properly. Do not open orbreak the airbag coverings. If thereare any opened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbag coveringand/or airbag module replaced. Forthe location of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? 0 85. Seeyour dealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle. A damagedairbag system may not properlyprotect you and your passenger(s)in a crash, resulting in seriousinjury or even death. To help makesure the airbag systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. See yourdealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 134.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear the vehicle’sseat belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:



. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Doesthe shoulder belt rest on theshoulder? If yes, continue. If no,try using the rear seat beltcomfort guide, if available. See“Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 77. If acomfort guide is not available, or ifthe shoulder belt still does not reston the shoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs?If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

. Can proper seat belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way to wearseat belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulder belt

can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck.The lap belt should fit snuglybelow the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. This applies beltforce to the child's pelvic bones ina crash. It should never be wornover the abdomen, which couldcause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Seat Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 77.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children needto use seat belts properly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one child towear the same seat belt. The seatbelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, they can

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A seat belt must be used byonly one person at a time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear the seatbelt with the shoulder belt behindtheir back. A child can be seriouslyinjured by not wearing thelap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not be

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

restrained by the shoulder belt. Thechild could move too far forwardincreasing the chance of head andneck injury. The child might alsoslide under the lap belt. The beltforce would then be applied righton the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, foreveryone, to use safety restraints. Infact, the law in every state in theUnited States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor, butit cannot do this if it is wrappedaround a child’s neck. If theshoulder belt is locked and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

tightened around a child’s neck, theonly way to loosen the belt is tocut it.

Never leave children unattended ina vehicle and never allow childrento play with the seat belts.

Every time infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints. Neither the vehicle'sseat belt system nor its airbag systemis designed for them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant or child should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

killed. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front outboard seat.Secure a rear-facing child restraintin a rear seat. It is also better tosecure a forward-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. If you mustsecure a forward-facing childrestraint in the front outboard seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

Child restraints are devices used torestrain, seat, or position children inthe vehicle and are sometimes calledchild seats or car seats.

There are three basic types of childrestraints:

. Forward-facing child restraints

. Rearward-facing child restraints

. Belt-positioning booster seats

The proper child restraint for yourchild depends on their size, weight,and age, and also on whether thechild restraint is compatible with thevehicle in which it will be used.

For each type of child restraint, thereare many different models available.When purchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used in amotor vehicle. If it is, the restraint willhave a label saying that it meetsfederal motor vehicle safety standards.The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are manykinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.



{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck and headinjury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularseat belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should. Instead,it may settle up around the child'sabdomen. In a crash, the belt wouldapply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure.This alone could cause serious orfatal injuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children should alwaysbe secured in appropriate childrestraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

A rear-facing child restraint providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keepthe infant positioned in the restraint.

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

A forward-facing child restraintprovides restraint for the child's bodywith the harness.



Booster Seats

A belt-positioning booster seat is usedfor children who have outgrown theirforward-facing child restraint.Boosters are designed to improve thefit of the vehicle's seat belt systemuntil the child is large enough for thevehicle seat belts to fit properlywithout a booster seat. See the seatbelt fit test in Older Children 0 95.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s seat belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. Child restraints must besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts orthe lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 102 for moreinformation. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in thevehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which may beon the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The childrestraint instructions are important,so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified Child PassengerSafety Technicians (CPSTs) areavailable to inspect and demonstratehow to correctly use and install childrestraints. In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.



Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properlyfollowing the instructions thatcame with that child restraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in an appropriatechild restraint secured in a rearseating position.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured in arear seating position.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint can beinstalled in any second row seatingposition.

Never put a rear-facing child restraintin the front. This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great ifthe airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front passenger airbaginflates. This is because the back ofthe rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat is ina forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, no systemis fail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deploy undersome unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System 0 90for additional information.

When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seats varyconsiderably in size, and some may fitin certain seating positions betterthan others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be able toaccess adjacent seat belts or LATCHanchors for additional passengers orchild restraints. Adjacent seating



positions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of theseat belt.

Wherever a child restraint is installed,be sure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint systemand secure the child restraint systemproperly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in the vehicle.The LATCH system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installed usingeither the LATCH anchors or thevehicle’s seat belts. Do not use boththe seat belts and the LATCHanchorage system to secure arear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’s seatbelts to secure the child and thebooster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seat besecured with the LATCH system, thiscan be done as long as the boosterseat can be positioned properly andthere is no interference with theproper positioning of the lap-shoulderbelt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also use eitherthe lower anchors or the seat belts toproperly secure the child restraint.

A child restraint must never beinstalled using only the top tether andanchor.

The LATCH anchorage system can beused until the combined weight of thechild plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the seat belt aloneinstead of the LATCH anchoragesystem once the combined weight ismore than 29.5 kg (65 lbs).

See Securing Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 112 orSecuring Child Restraints (With the SeatBelt in the Rear Seat) 0 110.

Child restraints built after March 2014will be labeled with the specific childweight up to which the LATCH systemcan be used to install the restraint.

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions havelower anchors. In this case, the seatbelt must be used (with top tetherwhere available) to secure the childrestraint.See Securing Child Restraints (With the



Seat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 110 orSecuring Child Restraints (With the SeatBelt in the Rear Seat) 0 110.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal bars builtinto the vehicle. There are two loweranchors for each LATCH seatingposition that will accommodate achild restraint with lowerattachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3,4) is used to secure thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment hook (2) on the childrestraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order toreduce the forward movement androtation of the child restraint duringdriving or in a crash.

The child restraint may have a singletether (3) or a dual tether (4). Eitherwill have a single attachment hook (2)to secure the top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with top tethersare designed for use with or withoutthe top tether being attached. Othersrequire the top tether always to beattached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraintshave a top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row — 60/40

H : Seating positions with two loweranchors.



I : Seating positions with top tetheranchors.

Second Row — Bucket

H : Seating positions with two loweranchors.


Third Row Seat


To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, near thecrease between the seatback and theseat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchor symbolis near the top tether anchors forsecond row seats. For third row seats,the top tether anchor symbol is on theflipper panel.

Second Row Seat — Bucket

For models with bucket second rowseating, the top tether anchors are atthe bottom rear of the seat cushionfor each seating position in the second



row. Be sure to use an anchor on thesame side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Second Row Seat — 60/40

For models with 60/40 second rowseating, the top tether anchors are atthe bottom rear of the seat cushionfor each seating position in the secondrow. Be sure to use an anchor on thesame side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Third Row Seat

For the third row seat, the top tetheranchors are on the back of theseatback. Move the flipper panelrearward to access the anchors. Besure to use an anchor on the sameside of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 101 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System

{ Warning

A child could be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly attached tothe vehicle using either the LATCHanchors or the vehicle seat belt.Follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, do notattach more than one child

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

restraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during acrash. A child or others could beinjured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor, butit cannot do this if it is wrappedaround a child’s neck. If theshoulder belt is locked and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

tightened around a child’s neck, theonly way to loosen the belt is tocut it.

Buckle any unused seat beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock, andtighten the belt behind the childrestraint after the child restrainthas been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCH attachmentsrub against the vehicle’s seat belts.This may damage these parts.If necessary, move buckled seatbelts to avoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the rear seatback whenthe seat is occupied. Do not fold theempty rear seat with a seat belt

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

buckled. This could damage theseat belt or the seat. Unbuckle andreturn the seat belt to its stowedposition, before folding the seat.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint can beinstalled in any second row seatingposition.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 101.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do not usethe vehicle's seat belts. Instead usethe vehicle's anchors and childrestraint attachments to secure therestraints. Some restraints also useanother vehicle anchor to secure a toptether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraint



does not have lower attachmentsor the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint withthe seat belts and top tetherwhen recommended by the childrestraint manufacturer. Refer toyour child restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual. For the third rowoutboard seating positions, if thehead restraint interferes with theproper installation of the childrestraint, then the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 102.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached, attachand tighten the top tether to thetop tether anchor. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

For the third row seat,move the flipper panelrearward to access the toptether anchors.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.



If the position you areusing has an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a singletether, raise the headrestor head restraint and routethe tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between theheadrest or head restraintposts.

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether around theinboard or outboard side ofthe headrest or headrestraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixed or anadjustable head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Third Row Seats0 73 for additional information.



2. Press the buttons on the headrestraint posts and pull up onthe head restraint.

3. Route the top tether of the childrestraint under the headrestraint.

4. With the head restraint facingrearward, insert the headrestraint posts into the holes inthe top of the seatback.

5. Push the head restraint down.

6. Try to move the head restraint tomake sure that it is locked inplace.

7. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not drive untilthe head restraints for all occupantsare installed and adjusted properly.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint, resultingin serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure theLATCH system is working properlyafter a crash, see your dealer tohave the system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.



If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during a crash,new LATCH system parts may beneeded.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of thecrash.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat)When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) 0 102 forhow and where to install the childrestraint using LATCH. If a childrestraint is secured in the vehicleusing a seat belt and it uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) 0 102 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the seat beltto secure the child restraint. Be sureto follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint.

If more than one child restraint needsto be installed in the rear seat, be sureto read Where to Put the Restraint0 101.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For the third row outboardseating positions, if the headrestraint interferes with theproper installation of the childrestraint, the head restraint maybe removed. See “Head RestraintRemoval and Reinstallation”under Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)0 102.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's seat belt through oraround the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check to see ifthe correct buckle is being used.

Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint system, so that the seatbelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down on thechild restraint as you tightenthe belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the childrestraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 102.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theseat belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and letit return to the stowed position. If thetop tether is attached to a top tetheranchor, disconnect it.

If the head restraint was removed fora third row outboard seating position,reinstall it before the seating position



is used. See “Head Restraint Removaland Reinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 102 for additionalinformation on reinstalling the headrestraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theFront Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat isa safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 101.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.See Passenger Sensing System 0 90 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 134for more information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facing

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

child restraint in the front outboardpassenger seat, always move theseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System 0 90for additional information.

If the child restraint uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 102 for toptether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have atop tether, and that the tether beattached.



When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.Move the seat upward or theseatback to an upright position,if needed, to get a tightinstallation of the child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag status indicatorshould light and stay lit whenyou start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 134.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's seat belt through oraround the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt, if needed.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint system, so that the seatbelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down on thechild restraint as you tightenthe belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theseat belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag status indicatorwill come on and stay on when thevehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 90.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and letit return to the stowed position.


STORAGE 115

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 115Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . . . . 115Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 117

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Storage Compartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharp objectsin storage compartments. In acrash, these objects may cause thecover to open and could result ininjury.

Instrument Panel Storage

Touch the bottom of the climatecontrol system panel until the doorautomatically starts to open. Thestorage area may contain a USB port.See the infotainment manual.

Keep the storage area door closedwhile driving.

Touch the bottom of the climatecontrol system again until the doorautomatically starts to close.

Glove Box

To open, press the button. Close theglove box manually.


116 STORAGE

Cupholders

To access the cupholders, press thecover and release.

There is storage in front of thecupholders. Push forward on thehandle to open.

Sunglasses Storage

If equipped, sunglasses storage is onthe overhead console. Press the fixedbutton on the cover and release toaccess.

Armrest StorageFor vehicles with a rear seat armrest,pull the loop at the top of the armrestdown to access the cupholders.

Rear Storage

There is storage in the floor of therear cargo area. Lift the handle toaccess. There is a removable divider tohelp organize.


STORAGE 117

Center Console Storage

Pull the handle and lift to access.There are auxiliary jacks, USB ports,an accessory power outlet, a totecompartment, and a device holderinside.

On the rear of the console there areauxiliary jacks, a power outlet, and astorage area.

See Power Outlets 0 124 and theinfotainment manual.

If equipped, press to turn on thecooled compartment inside the centerconsole storage.

The cooled compartment will helpkeep cold liquids cold, but is notintended to chill warm liquids. Do notuse for items that need to berefrigerated.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

There are four cargo tie-downs in therear cargo area. These can be used tostrap cargo down and keep it frommoving inside the vehicle.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located inthe rear, to store small loads as farforward as possible. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.


118 STORAGE

Roof Rack System

{ Warning

If something is carried on top of thevehicle that is longer or wider thanthe roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item being carriedcould be violently torn off, and thiscould cause a collision and damagethe vehicle. Never carry somethinglonger or wider than the roof rackon top of the vehicle unless using aGM certified accessory carrier.

If equipped, the roof rack can be usedto load items. For roof racks that donot have crossrails included,GM Certified crossrails can bepurchased as an accessory. See yourdealer for additional information.

Caution

Loading cargo on the roof rack thatweighs more than 100 kg (220 lb) orhangs over the rear or sides of thevehicle may damage the vehicle.Load cargo so that it rests evenlybetween the crossrails, making sureto fasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s center ofgravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle to makesure the cargo remains in its place.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle. Formore information on vehicle capacityand loading, see Vehicle Load Limits0 189.

A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is located above the rearwindow glass. Make sure items loadedon the roof of the vehicle do not blockor damage the CHMSL.


INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 119

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . 120Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . 120Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . 120Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . 120Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . 122Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . 134Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 135Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Brake System Warning Light . . . . 137Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . 137Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Sport Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Winter Driving Mode Light . . . . . . 139Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light . . . 139Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . 139Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . 141Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 142Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . . . 145

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Engine Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . 149Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . 150

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . 150

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . . . . . 158Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160


120 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Controls

Steering Wheel Adjustment

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel:

Press the control to move the steeringwheel up and down or forward andrearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steering wheelcontrols. See "Steering WheelControls" in the infotainment manual.

Heated Steering Wheel

( : If equipped, press to turn theheated steering wheel on or off. Anindicator next to the button is litwhen the feature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

To sound the horn, pressa on thesteering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is on theturn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withz FRONTon it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT : If Rainsense is turned off,turn thez FRONT band up formore frequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes. If Rainsense is turnedon, see Rainsense later in this section.

OFF : Turns the windshield wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes, holdthe band on8 longer.



Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozen tothe windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 278.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. An internal circuitbreaker to the motor will stop themotor until it cools down.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are onw,1, or3 INT,they will immediately stop.

Ifz FRONT is then moved to OFFbefore the driver door is opened orwithin 10 minutes, the wipers willrestart and move to the base of thewindshield.

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing or Rainsense, thewipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

Rainsense

With Rainsense, a sensor near the topcenter of the windshield detects theamount of water on the windshieldand controls the frequency of thewindshield wiper.

Keep this area of the windshield clearof debris to allow for best systemperformance.

3 INT : Turn thez FRONT bandon the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity when Rainsense isturned on.

. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down to lower INTsetting for less sensitivity tomoisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

z AUTO : Press to turn Rainsenseon or off. When turned on andzFRONT is in one of the Rainsensewipe sensitivity positions the wiperscan be adjusted for more or lesssensitivity to moisture. When turnedoff, the wipers operate as timedintermittent wipers and can beadjusted for more or less frequentwipes.

Ifz AUTO is turned on when theignition is turned on, or if the ignitionis in on and thez FRONT band isin one of the sensitivity settings whenz AUTO is turned on or off, amessage may display indicating ifRainsense was turned on or off.

If the ignition is in on andzFRONT is not in one of the sensitivitysettings whenz AUTO is turned on,a message may display indicating that



the wiper band must be in one of thesensitivity settings for Rainsense tooperate.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windshield wiper lever toOFF. This disables the automaticRainsense windshield wipers.

With Rainsense, if the transmission isin N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the wipers willautomatically stop at the base of thewindshield.

The wiper operations return to normalwhen the transmission is no longer inN (Neutral) or the vehicle speed hasincreased.

Windshield Washer

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not use thewasher until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washer fluidcan form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

L m : Push the paddle marked withthe windshield washer symbol at thetop of the turn signal lever to spraywasher fluid and activate the wipers.The wipers will continue until thepaddle is released or the maximumwash time is reached. When thepaddle is released, additional wipesmay occur depending on how long thewindshield washer had been activated.See Washer Fluid 0 272 forinformation on filling the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper control is on the turnsignal lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

OFF : Turns the wiper off.

INT : Turns on the rear wiper with adelay between wipes.

ON : Turns on the rear wiper.

= REAR : Press this button on theend of the lever to spray washer fluidon the rear window. The wipers willclear the rear window and either stopor return to your preset speed. Formore washer cycles, press and holdthe button.

The rear window wiper/washer willnot operate if the liftgate or liftglass isopen or ajar. If the liftgate or liftglassis opened while the rear wiper is on,the wiper returns to the parkedposition and stops.

Rear Camera Mirror Washer :If equipped, press= REAR on the endof the lever to spray washer fluid onthe rear mirror camera lens. See RearCamera Mirror 0 51.



Rear Wiper Arm AssemblyProtection

When using an automatic car wash,move the rear wiper control to OFF todisable the rear wiper. In somevehicles, if the transmission is inN (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the rear wiper willautomatically park under the rearspoiler.

The wiper operations return to normalwhen the transmission is no longer inN (Neutral) or the vehicle speed hasincreased.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, the rearwiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the shift lever is inR (Reverse), and the front windshieldwiper is performing low or high speedwipes. If the rear wiper control is off,the shift lever is in R (Reverse), andthe front windshield wiper isperforming interval wipes, then therear wiper automatically performsinterval wipes.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 150.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid 0 272.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receives itsheading and other information fromthe Global Positioning System (GPS)antenna, StabiliTrak, and vehiclespeed information.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number of milesor degrees of turn before needing asignal from the GPS satellites. Whenthe compass display shows CAL, drivethe vehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive a GPSsignal. The compass system willautomatically determine when a GPSsignal is restored and provide aheading again.

ClockThe infotainment system controls areused to access the time and datesettings through the menu system.See “Home Page” in the infotainmentmanual for information about how touse the menu system.

Setting the Clock

Time

To set the time:

1. From the Home Page, touchSETTINGS, then touch Timeand Date.

2. Touch Set Time, then touch + or− to increase or decrease hoursor minutes, and change AMor PM.

3. Touch 12-24 Hr for a 12 or24 hour clock.

4. Touch [ Back to go back to theprevious menu.

Date

To set the date:




2. Touch Set Date, then touch +or − to increase or decreasemonth, day, or year.


Auto Set

When on, the time and date willautomatically update.

To set auto set:


2. Touch Set Time or Set Date.

3. Touch Auto Set, then selectOn-Cell Network or Off-Manualto manually set the timeand date.


If auto set is on, the time displayed onthe clock may not update immediatelywhen driving into a new time zone.

In some regions, auto set may requirean active OnStar service plan,if available.

Clock Display

When on, the digital clock will displayon the infotainment screen.

To set the clock display:


2. Touch Clock Display, then selectOff or On.


Power OutletsPower Outlets 12-Volt Direct Current

Accessory power outlets can be usedto plug in electrical equipment, suchas a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has five accessory poweroutlets:

. One near the cupholders on thecenter console

. One inside the center console

. One on the rear of the centerconsole

. One in the third row seat on thedriver side

. One in the rear cargo area on thepassenger side

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

The accessory power outlets arepowered as follows:

. The power outlet near thecupholders on the center consoleis powered in Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) mode. This outlet canbe configured to operate usingRAP or battery power. If the poweroutlet is used while in the batterypower mode, this could causeinterference between the RKEtransmitter and the vehicle, andthe vehicle may not start. SeeIgnition Positions 0 195.

. The power outlets inside thecenter console and on the rear ofthe center console are poweredwhen the vehicle is started or theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY,or until the driver door is opened



within 10 minutes of turning offthe vehicle. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 199.

. The power outlets in the third rowseat and in the rear cargo area arepowered at all times.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum 15 amprating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle or adapter fuses. If a problemis experienced, see your dealer.

When adding electrical equipment, besure to follow the proper installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 257.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment from thepower outlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, such ascell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110/120 VoltAlternating Current

This power outlet can be used to plugin electrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The 110/120 volt power outlet is onthe rear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the vehicle is started,equipment requiring less than 150watts is plugged into the outlet, andno system fault is detected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is off or if theequipment is not fully seated into theoutlet.

If equipment is connected using morethan 150 watts or a system fault isdetected, a protection circuit shuts offthe power supply and the indicatorlight turns off. To reset the circuit,unplug the item and plug it back in orturn the ignition off and then back toon. The power restarts whenequipment using 150 watts or less isplugged into the outlet and a systemfault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools



. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such as microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touch sensorlamps

. Medical equipment.

Wireless ChargingThe vehicle may have wirelesscharging on top of the center console.See Center Console Storage 0 117. Thesystem operates at 145 kHz andwirelessly charges one PMA or Qicompatible mobile device. The poweroutput of the system is capable ofcharging at a rate up to 1 amp (5W),as requested by the compatible mobiledevice. See Radio Frequency Statement0 365.

To check for phone or other devicecompatibility:

. In the U.S., see my.cadillac.com/learn.

. In Canada, see gmtotalconnect.ca.

. Or, see your dealer for details.

{ Warning

Wireless charging can affect theoperation of an implantedpacemaker or other medical devices.If you have one, it is recommendedto consult with your doctor beforeusing the wireless charging system.

The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) must be active. Thewireless charging feature may notcorrectly indicate charging when thevehicle is in RAP. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 199.

The operating temperature is −20 °C(−4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for thecharging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to35 °C (95 °F) for the phone.

{ Warning

Remove all objects from thecharging pad before charging yourmobile device. Objects, such ascoins, keys, rings, paper clips,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or cards, between the phone andcharging pad will become very hot.On the rare occasion that thecharging system does not detect anobject, and the object gets wedgedbetween the phone and charger,remove the phone and allow theobject to cool before removing itfrom the charging pad, to preventburns.

To charge a mobile device:



1. Remove all objects from thecharging pad. The system maynot charge if there are anyobjects between the mobiledevice and charging pad.

2. Place the mobile device face upagainst the alignment rib on thecharge pad.

3. The} will display on the V onthe infotainment screen. Thisindicates that the mobile deviceis properly positioned andcharging. If a mobile device isplaced on the charging pad and} does not display, remove themobile device from the pad, turnit 180 degrees, and waitthree seconds before placing/aligning the mobile device on thepad again.

Software Acknowledgements

Certain Wireless Charging Moduleproduct from LG Electronics, Inc.("LGE") contains the open sourcesoftware detailed below. Refer to theindicated open source licenses (as areincluded following this notice) for theterms and conditions of their use.

OSS Notice Information

To obtain the source code that iscontained in this product, please visithttp://opensource.lge.com. In additionto the source code, all referred licenseterms, warranty disclaimers andcopyright notices are available fordownload. LG Electronics will alsoprovide open source code to you onCD-ROM for a charge covering thecost of performing such distribution(such as the cost of media, shipping,and handling) upon email request [email protected]. This offer isvalid for three (3) years from the dateon which you purchased the product.

Freescale-WCT library

Copyright (c) 2012-2014 FreescaleSemiconductor, Inc.. All rightsreserved.

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, this list of conditions andthe following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary formmust reproduce the abovecopyright notice, this list ofconditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentationand/or other materials providedwith the distribution.

3. Neither the name of thecopyright holder nor the namesof its contributors may be usedto endorse or promote productsderived from this softwarewithout specific prior writtenpermission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS ANDCONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AREDISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALLTHE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANYDIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTEGOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSEDAND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,



WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICTLIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THEUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IFADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OFSUCH DAMAGE.

Cigarette LighterIf equipped with a cigarette lighter, itis in the center console near thecupholders. Press on the access doorto open it and use the lighter.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in,and let go. When it is ready, it willpop back out by itself.

Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let the lighterback away from the heatingelement when it is hot. Damagefrom overheating can occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fusecould be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it isheating.

AshtraysIf equipped, the ashtray is in thecenter console cupholder.

Caution

If papers, pins, or other flammableitems are put in the ashtray, hotcigarettes or other smokingmaterials could ignite them andpossibly damage the vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, pull it fromthe cupholder. Push it back down tobe sure it is secure.

Warning Lights, Gauges,and IndicatorsWarning lights and gauges can signalthat something is wrong before itbecomes serious enough to cause anexpensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to the warning lightsand gauges could prevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started to indicatethey are working. When one of thewarning lights comes on and stays onwhile driving, or when one of thegauges shows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Balanced Cluster Shown, Metric Similar



Reconfigurable InstrumentCluster

The cluster display layout can bechanged.

Balanced Configuration

The Balanced configuration has threeinteractive display zones: one in thecenter of each of the gauges.

Enhanced Configuration

The Enhanced configuration has threeinteractive display zones.

Use the five-way control on the rightside of the steering wheel to movebetween the different display zonesand scroll through the differentdisplays.

To change the cluster configuration:

1. Find the Options page in one ofthe interactive display zones onthe cluster.

2. Press SEL to enter theOptions menu.

3. Scroll down to highlight DisplayLayout. Then press SEL toselect it.

4. Each layout in the menu isrepresented by a small previewimage of the display layout.Scroll up or down and highlightthe selection. Press SEL to selectthe desired cluster configuration.

5. Exit the Display Layout menu bypressing S.

Cluster Application Displays

The cluster can display informationregarding Navigation, Audio, andPhone.

Navigation

If there is no active route, a compasswill be displayed. If there is an activeroute, press SEL to end route guidanceor turn the voice prompts on or off.

Audio

While the Audio application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter theAudio menu. In the Audio menu,search for music, select from favorites,or change the audio source.

Phone

While the Phone application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter thePhone menu. In the Phone menu,if there is no active phone call, viewrecent calls, select from favorites,or scroll through contacts. If there isan active call, mute the phone orswitch to handset operation.

Cluster Options Menu

To enter the cluster Options menu:

1. Use the five-way control on theright side of the steering wheelto find the Options page in oneof the interactive display zoneson the cluster.



2. Press SEL on the center of thefive-way control to enter theOptions menu.

Units : Press SEL while Units ishighlighted to enter the Unit menu.Choose US or metric units by pressingSEL while the desired item ishighlighted. A checkmark will bedisplayed next to the selected item.

Info Pages : Press SEL while InfoPages is highlighted to select theitems to be displayed in the DIC infodisplays. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 143.

Fav Button Options : Press SEL whileFav Button Options is highlighted toselect between FAV Primary and SEEKPrimary. This selection allows forconfiguration of the C andBsteering wheel controls. When FAVPrimary is selected, pressing C andB will go to the next or previousfavorite and pressing and holding CandB will seek. When SEEK Primary

is selected, pressing C andB will

seek and pressing and holding C andB will go to the next or previousfavorite.

Display Layout : Press SEL whileDisplay Layout is highlighted tochange the configuration of thecluster. See “ReconfigurableInstrument Cluster” earlier in thissection.

Head-up Display (HUD) Rotation :This feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image. Press SEL onthe steering wheel controls whileHead-up Display Rotation ishighlighted to enter Adjust Mode.Pressy orz to adjust the angle of

the HUD display. Press S or T tohighlight OK, then press SEL to savethe setting. Cancel can also beselected to cancel the setting. Thevehicle must be in P (Park).

Open Source Software : Press SELwhile Open Source Software ishighlighted to display open sourcesoftware information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle'sspeed in either kilometers per hour(km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven since the tripodometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 143.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions per minute (rpm).



Fuel Gauge

Balanced Configuration

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how much fuelis left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuel gaugepointing to the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicle shouldbe refueled soon.

Here are four things that some ownersask about. None of these show aproblem with the fuel gauge:

. At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuel tofill up than the gauge indicated.For example, the gauge may haveindicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more orless than half the tank's capacityto fill the tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few seconds tostabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric Balanced Configuration



English Balanced Configuration

This gauge measures the temperatureof the vehicle's engine.

While driving under normal operatingconditions, if the needle moves intothe red area, the engine is too hot.Pull off the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Seat Belt Reminders

Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light

There is a driver seat belt reminderlight on the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, this lightflashes and a chime may come on toremind the driver to fasten their seatbelt. Then the light stays on soliduntil the belt is buckled. This cyclemay continue several times if thedriver remains or becomes unbuckledwhile the vehicle is moving.

If the driver seat belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Seat Belt ReminderLight

There is a passenger seat beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. See PassengerSensing System 0 90.

When the vehicle is started, this lightflashes and a chime may come on toremind passengers to fasten their seatbelt. Then the light stays on soliduntil the belt is buckled. This cyclecontinues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle is moving.

If the passenger seat belt is buckled,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

The front passenger seat belt reminderlight and chime may turn on if anobject is put on the seat such as abriefcase, handbag, grocery bag,laptop, or other electronic device. Toturn off the reminder light and/orchime, remove the object from theseat or buckle the seat belt.



Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), the passengersensing system, the pretensioners, theairbag modules, the wiring, and thecrash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System 0 84.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when the vehicle isstarted. If the light does not come onthen, have it fixed immediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

working properly. The airbags in thevehicle might not inflate in a crash,or they could even inflate without acrash. To help avoid injury, havethe vehicle serviced right away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger Sensing System0 90 for important safety information.The passenger airbag status indicatoris in the overhead console.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicator willlight ON and OFF, or the symbols foron and off, for several seconds as asystem check. Then, after several moreseconds, the status indicator will lighteither ON or OFF, or the on or offsymbol, to let you know the status ofthe front outboard passenger frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is liton the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is liton the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.



If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. See yourdealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 134 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned on,but the engine is not running, as acheck to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be a problemwith the electrical charging system.Have it checked by your dealer.Driving while this light is on coulddrain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) also displays a message.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radio andair conditioner.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-board diagnosticsystem. If this light is on while theengine is running, a malfunction hasbeen detected and the vehicle mayrequire service. The light should come

on to show that it is working whenthe ignition is in Service Mode. SeeIgnition Positions 0 195.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly when itcomes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may not runsmoothly. This could lead to costlyrepairs that might not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.



Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do not meetthe original tire specifications, cancause this light to come on. Thiscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also affect the vehicle’sability to pass an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications 0 260.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon aspossible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicle offand wait at least 10 seconds beforerestarting the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previousguidelines and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. If fuel has been added to thevehicle using the capless fuelfunnel adapter, make sure that ithas been removed. See “Filling theTank with a Portable Gas Can”under Filling the Tank 0 244. Thediagnostic system can detect if theadapter has been left installed inthe vehicle, allowing fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with theadapter removed may turn off thelight.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmed

up. If this occurs, change the fuelbrand. It may require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turnthe light off. See Fuel 0 243.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, the testequipment will likely connect to thevehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steering wheel.Connecting devices that are not usedto perform an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test or to service thevehicle may affect vehicle operation.See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 257.See your dealer if assistance is needed.



The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engine isrunning.

. The light does not come on whenthe ignition is in Service Mode.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen if the12-volt battery has recently beenreplaced or run down, or if thevehicle has been recently serviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle will notpass or cannot be made ready forthe test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consists oftwo hydraulic circuits. If one circuit isnot working, the remaining circuit can

still work to stop the vehicle. Fornormal braking performance, bothcircuits need to be working.

If the warning light comes on, there isa brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.

If the light comes on and stays on,there is a brake problem.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warning light

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

on can lead to a crash. If the light isstill on after the vehicle has beenpulled off the road and carefullystopped, have the vehicle towed forservice.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English

This light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied. If the light continuesflashing after the parking brake isreleased, or while driving, there is aproblem with the Electric ParkingBrake system. A message may alsodisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.



Service Electric ParkingBrake Light

If this light comes on and stays on,there is a problem with a system onthe vehicle that is causing the parkingbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible. See Electric ParkingBrake 0 212. A message may alsodisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset the system.If the ABS light stays on, or comes onagain while driving, the vehicle needsservice. A chime may also sound whenthe light comes on steady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, but theantilock brakes are not functioning.

If both the ABS and the brake systemwarning light are on, the vehicle'santilock brakes are not functioningand there is a problem with theregular brakes. See your dealer forservice.

See Brake System Warning Light 0 137.

Sport Mode Light

This light comes on when Sport modeis selected. See Magnetic Ride Control0 217.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/Haul Modefeature, this light comes on when theTow/Haul Mode has been activated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 206.



Winter Driving Mode Light

This light comes on when Snow/Icemode is selected. See Magnetic RideControl 0 217.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light

This light is green if LKA is availableto assist.

LKA may assist by gently turning thesteering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thatdirection. The LKA light will turnamber.

This light is amber and flashes as aLane Departure Warning (LDW) alert,to indicate that the lane marking hasbeen crossed.

See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 241.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator will displaygreen when a vehicle is detectedahead and amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 235.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.




StabiliTrak OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If StabiliTrak and TCS are off, thesystem does not assist in controllingthe vehicle. Turn on the TCS and theStabiliTrak systems, and the warninglight turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagemay display. Check the DIC messagesto determine which feature(s) is nolonger functioning and whether thevehicle requires service.

If the light is on and flashing, the TCSand/or the StabiliTrak system isactively working.


Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicator lightgoes off.

Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Driving withthis light on can damage the engineand it may not be covered by thevehicle warranty. See EngineOverheating 0 271.



The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating 0 271.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides information abouttire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more of thetires are significantly underinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC) tirepressure message may also display.Stop as soon as possible, and inflate

the tires to the pressure value shownon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure 0 299.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the light willcome on at every ignition cycle. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 302.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Check theoil level as soon as possible. Add oilif required, but if the oil level iswithin the operating range and theoil pressure is still low, have the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

vehicle serviced. Always follow themaintenance schedule for changingengine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehicle couldbe low on oil and might have someother system problem. See your dealer.



Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tank islow on fuel. The light turns off whenfuel is added. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicle

serviced by your dealer. If the systemis working normally, the indicatorlight turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 48.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer0 163.

IntelliBeam® Light

This light comes on when theIntelliBeam system, if equipped, isenabled. See Exterior Lamp Controls0 161.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when the exteriorlamps are in use. See Exterior LampControls 0 161.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is white whenthe cruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise control isset and active.



See Cruise Control 0 218.

Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light is white when the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC, if equipped) is onand ready, and turns green when theACC is set and active. See AdaptiveCruise Control 0 220.

Door Ajar Light

For vehicles equipped with this light,it comes on when a door is open ornot securely latched. Before driving,check that all doors are properlyclosed.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC is displayed in theinstrument cluster. It shows the statusof many vehicle systems.

y orz : Move SEL up or down togo to the previous or next selection.

S or T : Press to move between theinteractive display zones in thecluster. Press S to go back to theprevious menu.

SEL : Press to open a menu or select amenu item. Press and hold to resetvalues on certain screens.

DIC Information Display Options

The info displays on the DIC can beturned on or off through theSettings menu.

1. Press SEL while viewing theSettings page in one of theinteractive display zones on thecluster.

2. Scroll to Info Pages andpress SEL.

3. Pressy orz to move throughthe list of possible info displays.

4. Press SEL while an item ishighlighted to select or deselectthat item. When an item isselected, a checkmark will appearnext to it.

DIC Information Displays

The following is the list of all possibleDIC information displays. Some of theinformation displays may not beavailable for your particular vehicle.



Trip 1 or Trip 2 and Average FuelEconomy : The Trip display shows thecurrent distance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe trip odometer was last reset. Thetrip odometer can be reset by pressingand holding SEL while this display isactive.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate average litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg). This numberis calculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.This number reflects only theapproximate average fuel economythat the vehicle has right now, andwill change as driving conditionschange. The Average Fuel Economycan be reset along with the tripodometer by pressing and holding SELwhile this display is active.

Also shows if the Active FuelManagement is active and inV4 mode, or inactive and in V8 mode.See Active Fuel Management 0 200.

Fuel Range : Shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. LOW will bedisplayed when the vehicle is low onfuel. The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy : Showsthe current fuel economy in eitherliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the approximate fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow and changes frequently as drivingconditions change.

Average Speed : Shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometers perhour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).This average is calculated based onthe various vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. Theaverage speed can be reset by pressingand holding SEL while this display isactive.

Timer : This display can be used as atimer. To start the timer, press SELwhile this display is active. The

display will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset. To stop the timer, press SELbriefly while this display is active andthe timer is running. To reset thetimer to zero, press and hold SELwhile this display is active.

Turn Arrow : Shows the nextmaneuver when using route guidance.

Estimated Time to Arrival : Showsthe estimated time until arrival atyour destination.

Distance to Destination : Shows thedistance to the destination whenusing route guidance.

Speed Limit : Shows the currentspeed limit. The information for thispage comes from a roadway database.

Speed Warning : Allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press SEL when Speed Warning isdisplayed. Pressy orz to adjust thevalue. This feature can be turned offby pressing and holding SEL whileviewing this page. If the selected



speed limit is exceeded, a pop-upwarning is displayed and a chime maysound.

Cruise Set Speed : Shows the speedthe cruise control or Adaptive CruiseControl is set to.

Follow Distance Indicator : WhenAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is notengaged, the current follow time tothe vehicle ahead is displayed as atime value on this page. When ACChas been engaged, the displayswitches to the gap setting page. Thispage shows the current gap settingalong with the vehicle ahead indicator.

Battery Voltage : Shows the currentbattery voltage.

Oil Life : Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low, theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagewill appear on the display. The oilshould be changed as soon aspossible. See Engine Oil 0 263. Inaddition to the engine oil life system

monitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 341.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will not resetitself. Do not reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately until thenext oil change. To reset the engineoil life system, press and hold SEL forseveral seconds while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 265.

Oil Pressure : Shows the engine oilpressure in kPa (kilopascals)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Engine Hours : Shows the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.

Transmission Fluid Temperature :Shows the temperature of theautomatic transmission fluid in eitherdegrees Celsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

Tire Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all four tires.Tire pressure is displayed in eitherkilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per

square inch (psi). If the pressure islow, the value for that tire is shown inamber.See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 301and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation0 302.

Blank Page : Allows for noinformation to be displayed in thecluster info display areas.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with HUD, someinformation concerning the operationof the vehicle is projected onto thewindshield. The image is projectedthrough the HUD lens on top of the



instrument panel. The informationappears as an image focused outtoward the front of the vehicle.

Caution

If you try to use the HUD image asa parking aid, you may misjudgethe distance and damage yourvehicle. Do not use the HUD imageas a parking aid.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayed ineither English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement is changed through theinstrument cluster. See VehiclePersonalization 0 150 and “ClusterSettings Menu” under InstrumentCluster 0 129.

HUD Display on the VehicleWindshield

The HUD may display some of thefollowing vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts:

. Speed

. Tachometer

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Collision Alert

. Cruise Control

. Lane Departure

. Low Fuel

Some vehicle messages or alertsdisplayed in the HUD may be clearedby using the steering wheel controls.See Vehicle Messages 0 149.

Some information shown may not beavailable on your vehicle if it is notequipped with these features.

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Use the following settings toadjust the HUD.

$ : Press down or lift up to centerthe HUD image. The HUD image canonly be adjusted up and down, notside to side.



! : Press to select the display view.Each press will change thedisplay view.

D : Lift up and hold to brighten thedisplay. Press down and hold to dimthe display. Hold down to turn thedisplay off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUD brightnesscontrol can also be adjusted asneeded.

The HUD image can temporarily lightup depending on the angle andposition of the sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could make theHUD image harder to see.

Head-Up Display (HUD) RotationOption

This feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image.

Press SEL on the steering wheelcontrols while Head-up DisplayRotation is highlighted to enter Adjust

Mode. Pressy orz to adjust the

angle of the HUD display. Press S orT to highlight OK, then press SEL tosave the setting. CANCEL can also beselected to cancel the setting. Thevehicle must be in P (Park). SeeInstrument Cluster 0 129.

Press SEL on the steering wheelcontrols while Head-up DisplayRotation is highlighted to enter AdjustMode. Pressy orz to adjust the

angle of the HUD display. Press S orT to highlight OK, then press SEL tosave the setting. CANCEL can also beselected to cancel the setting. Thevehicle must be in P (Park). SeeInstrument Cluster 0 129.

HUD Views

There are four views in the HUD.Some vehicle information and vehiclemessages or alerts may be displayedin any view.

Metric

English

Speed View : This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), speed limit, AdaptiveCruise Control speed, Lane DepartureWarning, and vehicle ahead indicator.Some information only appears onvehicles that have these features, andwhen they are active.



Metric

English

Audio/Phone View : This displays thespeed view along with audio/phoneinformation. The current radio station,media type, and incoming calls will bedisplayed.

All HUD views may briefly displayaudio information when the driveruses the steering wheel controls toadjust the audio settings appearing inthe instrument cluster.

Incoming phone calls appearing in theinstrument cluster may also display inany HUD view.

Metric

English

Navigation View : This displays thespeed view along with Turn-by-TurnNavigation information. The compassheading is displayed when navigationrouting is not active.

Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alertsshown in the instrument cluster mayalso be displayed in any HUD view.

Metric

English

Performance View : This displays thespeedometer reading, rpm reading,transmission positions, and gear shiftindicator.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshield toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity of theHUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe thelens gently, then dry it.



HUD Troubleshooting

Check that:

. Nothing is covering the HUD lens.

. HUD brightness setting is not toodim or too bright.

. HUD is adjusted to the properheight.

. Polarized sunglasses are not worn.

. Windshield and HUD lens areclean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See Windshield Replacement0 279.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiple messagesmay appear one after another.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared by pressingSEL. The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously; clearing the message doesnot correct the problem.

If a SERVICE message appears, seeyour dealer.

Follow the instructions given in themessages. The system displaysmessages regarding the followingtopics:

. Service Messages

. Fluid Levels

. Vehicle Security

. Brakes

. Ride Control Systems

. Driver Assistance Systems

. Cruise Control

. Lighting and Bulb Replacement

. Wiper/Washer Systems

. Doors and Windows

. Seat Belts

. Airbag Systems

. Engine and Transmission

. Tire Pressure

. Battery

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's propulsion power is reduced.Reduced propulsion power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noobserved reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the nexttime the vehicle is driven. The vehiclemay be driven while this message ison, but maximum acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytime this



message stays on, or displaysrepeatedly, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TO XXXKM/H (MPH)

This message shows that the vehiclespeed has been limited to the speeddisplayed. The limited speed is aprotection for various propulsion andvehicle systems, such as lubrication,thermal, suspension, Teen Driver ifequipped, or tires.

Vehicle PersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menus forcustomizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Audio System Controls

1. Touch the desired feature todisplay a list of available options.

2. Touch to select the desiredfeature setting.

3. Touch S Back to return to theprevious menu or exit.

Touch SETTINGS from the Home Pageon the infotainment display.

Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:

. Time and Date

. Rear Seat Reminder

. Language

. Video Voice-Over

. Valet Mode

. Teen Driver

. Radio

. Vehicle

. Bluetooth

. Apple CarPlay

. Android Auto

. Voice

. Display

. Rear Camera

. Return to Factory Settings

. Software Information

. Wi-Fi

Detailed information for each menufollows.

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock 0 123.

Rear Seat Reminder

This allows for a chime and a messagewhen the rear door has been openedbefore or during operation of thevehicle.



Select Off or On.

Language

Select Language, then select from theavailable language(s).

The selected language will display onthe system, and voice recognition willreflect the selected language.

Video Voice-Over

When activated, the RSI will readaloud menu titles, menu listings,pop-ups, alerts, and file titles fromaudio and video media.

Select Off or On.

Valet Mode

This will lock the infotainment systemand steering wheel controls. It mayalso limit access to vehicle storagelocations, if equipped.

To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Select Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Touch LOCK or UNLOCK to lock orunlock the system. Touch Back to goback to the previous menu.

Teen Driver

See “Teen Driver” under “Settings” inthe infotainment manual.

Radio

Select to display the Radio menu andthe following may display:

. Manage Favorites

. Number of Favorites Shown

. Audible Touch Feedback

. Bose AudioPilot

. Auto Volume

. Maximum Startup Volume

. Audio Cue Volume

Manage Favorites

This allows favorites to be edited. See“Manage Favorites” in “Settings” under“Radio” in the infotainment manual.

Number of Favorites Shown

Touch to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number or selectAuto and the infotainment system willautomatically adjust the number offavorites shown.

Audible Touch Feedback

This allows Audible Touch Feedbackto be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Bose AudioPilot

This allows Bose AudioPilot to beturned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volume basedon vehicle speed and ambient noise.

Select Off, Low, Medium-Low,Medium, Medium-High, or High.

Maximum Startup Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greater thanthis level, the volume is adjusted tothis level. To set the maximumstartup volume, touch + or − toincrease or decrease.



Audio Cue Volume

This feature sets the volume of audiofiles played at system startup andshutdown.

Select On, then touch + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Vehicle

Select and the following may display:

. Climate and Air Quality

. Collision/Detection Systems

. Comfort and Convenience

. Lighting

. Power Door Locks

. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Climate and Air Quality


. Auto Fan Speed

. Auto Cooled Seats

. Auto Heated Seats

. Auto Defog

. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This feature will set the auto fanspeed.

Select Low, Medium, or High.

Auto Cooled Seats

When enabled, this feature willautomatically activate the cooled seatsat the level required by the interiortemperature. See Heated and CooledFront Seats 0 66.

Select Off or On.

Auto Heated Seats

When the vehicle is on, this featurewill automatically activate the heatedseats at the level required by thevehicle's interior temperature. SeeHeated and Cooled Front Seats 0 66.

Select Off or On.

Auto Defog

When set to On, the auto defog comeson when the climate control sensordetects high interior humidity. Air willbe directed to the windshield.

Select Off or On.

Auto Rear Defog

If equipped, this feature willautomatically turn on the rear windowdefogger when the vehicle is firststarted in cold weather and turn offwhen the vehicle is warmed.

Select Off or On.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/Detection Systemsmenu and the following may display:

. Alert Type

. Forward Collision System

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

. Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

. Park Assist

. Lane Change Alert

Alert Type

This feature will set crash alerts tobeeps or seat vibrations. This settingaffects all crash alerts includingForward Collision Alert, LaneDeparture Warning, and Park Assistalerts. See Driver Assistance Systems0 228.

Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.



Forward Collision System

This feature will turn on or offForward Collision Alert (FCA) andForward Automatic Braking (FAB).The Off setting disables all FCA andFAB functions. With the Alert andBrake setting, both FCA and FAB areavailable. The Alert setting disablesFAB. See Forward Automatic Braking(FAB) 0 238.

Select Off, Alert and Brake, or Alert.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This allows the Rear Cross TrafficAlert feature to be turned on or off.See Assistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 229.

Select Off or On.

Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

This feature will give a reminder thatAdaptive Cruise Control provideswhen it has brought the vehicle to acomplete stop behind anotherstopping vehicle, and then that vehicledrives on.

Select Off or On.

Park Assist

If equipped, this allows the feature tobe turned on or off. See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backing 0 229.

Select Off, On, or On with TowbarAttached.

Lane Change Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Lane Change Alert (LCA)0 239.

Select Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience


. Auto Running Boards

. Auto Memory Recall

. Easy Exit Options

. Chime Volume

. Hands Free Liftgate Control

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Auto Mirror Folding

. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Auto Running Boards

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Power Assist Steps 0 45.

Select Off, On, or Extended.

Auto Memory Recall

This feature automatically recalls thecurrent driver’s previously stored 1 or2 button positions when the ignitionis changed from off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY. See Memory Seats 0 63.

Select On or Off.

Easy Exit Options

This feature automatically recalls thepreviously stored exit button positionwhen exiting the vehicle. See MemorySeats 0 63.

Select Off or On.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of the chimevolume level.

Touch + or − to adjust the volume.



Hands Free Liftgate Control

The liftgate may be operated with akicking motion under the rear bumper.See Liftgate 0 41.

Select Off, On-Open and Close,or On-Open Only.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, the driver and/or passengermirrors will tilt downward when thevehicle is shifted to R (Reverse) toimprove visibility of the ground nearthe rear wheels. See Reverse TiltMirrors 0 51.

Select Off, On - Driver and Passenger,On - Driver, or On - Passenger.

Auto Mirror Folding

When on, the outside mirrors willautomatically fold or unfold when theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter Q or K button is pressedand held. See Folding Mirrors 0 50.

Select Off or On.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

When on and the front wiper is on,the rear wiper will automaticallyactivate when the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse).

Select Off or On.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing may display:

. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlamps and allows some of the exteriorlamps and most of the interior lampsto turn on briefly when K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed to locate thevehicle.

Select On or Off.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of how longthe exterior lamps stay on whenleaving the vehicle when it is darkoutside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds,or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may display:

. Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thevehicle is off, the driver door is open,and locking is requested. All the doorswill lock and only the driver door willunlock. See Lockout Protection 0 40.

If Off is selected, the Delayed DoorLock menu will be available.

Select Off or On.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.



Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select Off or On.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Start andthe following may display:

. Remote Unlock Light Feedback

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Remote Window Operation

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps will flashwhen unlocking the vehicle with theRKE transmitter.

Select Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the cooled seats onwhen using remote start onwarm days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the heated seats onwhen using remote start on cold days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Window Operation

This allows the windows to be openedwhen pressing K on the RKEtransmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 29.

Select Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selects feedback.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 29.

Select Off, On with Horn Chirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert when theRKE transmitter is left in the vehicle.This menu also enables Remote NoLonger in Vehicle Alert.

Select Off or On.



Bluetooth


. Pair New Device

. Device Management

. Ringtones

. Voice Mail Numbers

. Text Message Alerts

Pair New Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing” under “Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls)” in theinfotainment manual.

Device Management

Select to connect to a different phonesource, disconnect a phone, or deletea phone.

Ringtones

Select to change the ring tone for thespecific phone. The phone does notneed to be connected to change thering tone.

Voice Mail Numbers

This feature displays the voice mailnumber for all connected phones. Tochange the voice mail number, selectEDIT. Type a new number, thenselect SAVE.

Text Message Alerts

This feature allows text messages tobe received. See “Text Messaging”under “Phone” in the infotainmentmanual.

Select Off or On.

Apple CarPlay


. Apple CarPlay

. Manage Apple CarPlay Devices

Apple CarPlay

This feature allows Apple devices tobe connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.

Select Off or On.

Manage Apple CarPlay Devices

Select to manage Apple devices. AppleCarPlay must be on for this feature tobe accessed.

Android Auto


. Android Auto

. Manage Android Auto Devices

Android Auto

This feature allows Android devices tobe connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.

Select Off or On.

Manage Android Auto Devices

Select to manage Android devices.Android Auto must be on for thisfeature to be accessed.

Voice


. Confidence Threshold

. Prompt Length

. Audio Feedback Speed

. Display “What Can I Say?” Tips



Confidence Threshold

This feature allows the adjustment ofthe sensitivity of the speechrecognition system.

Select Confirm More or Confirm Less.

Prompt Length

This feature adjusts the voice promptlength.

Select Short or Long.

Audio Feedback Speed

This feature adjusts the audiofeedback speed.

Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.

Display “What Can I Say?” Tips

This feature gives voicecommand tips.

Select Off or On.

Display


. Mode

. Proximity Sensing

. Calibrate Touchscreen

. Turn Display Off

Mode

Select to change the display of theinfotainment system.

Select Auto, Day, or Night.

Proximity Sensing

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off.

Select Off, On, or On-Map Only.

Calibrate Touchscreen

Select to calibrate the touchscreen,then follow the prompts.

Turn Display Off

Select to turn the display off. Touchanywhere on the infotainment displayarea or press any controls on the radiocenter stack to turn the display on.

Rear Camera


. Guidance Lines

. Rear Park Assist Symbols

Guidance Lines

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 229.

Rear Park Assist Symbols

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 229.

Return to Factory Settings


. Restore Vehicle Settings

. Clear All Private Data

. Restore Radio Settings

Restore Vehicle Settings

This allows selection of restoringvehicle settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Clear All Private Data

This allows selection to clear allprivate information from the vehicle.

Select Delete or Cancel.



Restore Radio Settings

This allows selection to restore radiosettings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Software Information

Select to view the infotainmentsystem current software information.

Wi-Fi


. Wi-Fi

. Manage Wi-Fi Networks

Wi-Fi

This feature allows Wi-Fi networks tobe turned off or on.

Select Off or On.

Manage Wi-Fi Networks

Select to manage Wi-Fi networks.Wi-Fi must be on for this feature to beaccessed.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 365.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, and homeautomation devices. These

instructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming when vehicleownership is terminated. See “ErasingUniversal Remote System Buttons”later in this section.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door opener receiver.Clear all people and objects near thegarage door.



Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515.

Programming involves time-sensitiveactions, and may time out causing theprocedure to be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press and holdboth the hand-held transmitterbutton and one of the threeUniversal Remote systembuttons to be used to operate thegarage door. Do not release eitherbutton until the indicator light

goes from a slow to a rapidflashing light. Then release bothbuttons.

Some garage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 2with the procedure under “RadioSignals for Canada and SomeGate Operators” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicatorlight and garage door activation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when the buttonis pressed, then programmingis complete. There is no needto complete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light does notcome on or the garage doordoes not move, a secondbutton press may berequired. For a second time,press and hold the newlyprogrammed button for

five seconds. If the light stayson or the garage door moves,programming is complete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds, thenchanges to a solid light andthe garage door does notmove, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smart buttoninside the garage on the garagedoor opener receiver. The nameand color of the button may varyby manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.



6. Inside the vehicle, press and holdthe newly programmed UniversalRemote system button fortwo seconds and then release it.If the garage door does not moveor the lamp on the garage dooropener receiver does not flash,press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds,then release it. Again, if the doordoes not move or the garagedoor lamp does not flash, pressand hold the same button a thirdtime for two seconds, thenrelease it.

The Universal Remote system shouldnow activate the garage door.

Repeat the process for programmingthe two remaining buttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds of transmission.

This may not be long enough for theUniversal Remote system to pick upthe signal during programming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the Universal Remotesystem button while pressing andreleasing the hand-held transmitterbutton every two seconds until thesignal has been successfully acceptedby the Universal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button for atleast one-half second. The indicatorlight will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This should takeabout 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”


LIGHTING 161

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . 161Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 163Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Automatic Headlamp System . . . 164Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . 165Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Battery Load Management . . . . . . 168Battery Power Protection . . . . . . . . 168Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

P : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol toP again will turn theautomatic headlamps and DRLback on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, theoff position only works when thevehicle is shifted into the P (Park)position.

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off, dependingon outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps togetherwith the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, the headlampswill turn off automatically 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned off. Whenthe headlamps are turned on whilethe vehicle is off, the headlamps willstay on for 10 minutes beforeautomatically turning off to preventthe battery from being drained. Turnthe headlamp control to off and thenback to the headlamp on position tomake the headlamps stay on for anadditional 10 minutes.

IntelliBeam® System

If equipped, this system turns thevehicle's high-beam headlamps on andoff according to surrounding trafficconditions.


162 LIGHTING

The system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is dark enoughand there is no other traffic present.

Thisb light comes on in theinstrument cluster when theIntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam

To enable the IntelliBeam system,with the turn signal lever in theneutral position, turn the exteriorlamp control to AUTO. The bluehigh-beam on light appears on theinstrument cluster when the highbeams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam

The system only activates the highbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

There is a sensor near the top centerof the windshield, which automaticallycontrols the system. Keep this area ofthe windshield clear of debris to allowfor best system performance.

The high-beam headlamps remain on,under the automatic control, until oneof the following situations occurs:

. The system detects anapproaching vehicle's headlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is bright enoughthat high-beam headlamps are notrequired.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).

. The IntelliBeam system can bedisabled by the high/low-beamchanger or the flash-to-passfeature. If this happens, the high/low-beam changer must beactivated on then off withintwo seconds to reactivate theIntelliBeam system. Theinstrument cluster light will comeon to indicate the IntelliBeam isreactivated.See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 163 and Flash-to-Pass0 163.

The high beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect other vehicle's lamps becauseof any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps aremissing, damaged, obstructed fromview, or otherwise undetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannotbe detected due to dense exhaust,smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist,or other airborne obstructions.

. The vehicle's windshield is dirty,cracked, or obstructed bysomething that blocks the view ofthe light sensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such that thefront end points upward, causingthe light sensor to aim high andnot detect headlamps andtaillamps.

. The vehicle is being driven onwinding or hilly roads.

The automatic high-beam headlampsmay need to be disabled if any of theabove conditions exist.


LIGHTING 163

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turned onand the ignition is off. To turn off thechime, turn the exterior lamp controlto off or AUTO and then back on,or close and re-open the door. In theAUTO mode, the headlamps turn offonce the ignition is off or remain onuntil the headlamp delay ends (ifenabled in the DIC). See “ExitLighting” under Vehicle Personalization0 150.

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChangerPush the turn signal lever toward theinstrument panel to change theheadlamps from low to high beam.

Pull the turn signal lever toward youand release it to return to low-beamheadlamps.

When the high-beam headlamps areon, this indicator light on theinstrument cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you want topass. It works even if the headlampsare in the automatic position.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in the automaticposition or on low beam, thehigh-beam headlamps will turn on.They will stay on as long as you holdthe lever toward you. The high-beamindicator on the instrument clusterwill come on. Release the lever toreturn to normal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle during theday. Fully functional DRL are requiredon all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system comes on when thefollowing conditions are met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The transmission is not inP (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL system is on, only theDRL are on. The taillamps, sidemarkerlamps, instrument panel lights, andother lamps will not be on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp system switchesfrom DRL to the headlamps.


164 LIGHTING

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then release.For vehicles first sold in Canada, offwill only work when the vehicle isparked.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turns onthe headlamps at the normalbrightness, along with the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, and theinstrument panel lights. The radiolights will also be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lamp controltoP and then release it.

The vehicle has a light sensor on thetop of the instrument panel thatcontrols the automatic headlampsystem. Do not cover the sensor,otherwise the headlamps may comeon when they are not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage, heavy overcastweather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the automatic headlampsystem so that driving under bridgesor bright overhead street lights doesnot affect the system. The automaticheadlamp system is only affected

when the light sensor detects achange in lighting lasting longer thanthe delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem will come on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage, ittakes approximately one minute forthe automatic headlamp system tochange if it is bright enough outside.During that delay, the instrumentcluster may not be as bright as usual.Make sure the instrument panelbrightness control is in the full brightposition. See Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 166.

To idle the vehicle with the automaticheadlamp system off, turn the controlto the off position.

The headlamps will also stay on afteryou exit the vehicle.

The regular headlamp system can beturned on when needed.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers are activatedin daylight with the engine on, andthe exterior lamp control is in AUTO,the headlamps, parking lamps, and


LIGHTING 165

other exterior lamps come on. Thetransition time for the lamps comingon varies based on wiper speed. Whenthe wipers are not operating, theselamps turn off. Move the exteriorlamp control toP or; to disablethis feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.Press again to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers areon, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Move the turn signal lever all the wayup or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for less thanone second until the arrow starts toflash to signal a lane change. Thiscauses the turn signals toautomatically flash three times. It willflash six times if Tow/Haul Mode isactive. Holding the turn signal leverfor more than one second will causethe turn signals to flash until thelever is released.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly or donot come on, a signal bulb could beburned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0 282.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime soundsat each flash of the turn signal. Themessage TURN SIGNAL ON will alsoappear in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). To turn the chime andmessage off, move the turn signallever to the off position.


166 LIGHTING

Cornering LampsIf equipped with cornering lamps, theyautomatically come on when all of thefollowing occur:

. The low-beam headlamps are on.

. The turn signals are activated orthe steering wheel is at acalibrated angle.

. The vehicle speed is below thecalibrated speed.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightness ofthe instrument panel lights and isnext to the exterior lamp control.

D : Move the thumbwheel up ordown to brighten or dim the lights.

The brightness of the displaysautomatically adjusts based onoutdoor lighting. The instrumentpanel illumination control will set thelowest level to which the displays willbe automatically adjusted.

Dome Lamps

There are dome lamps in the overheadconsole and the headliner, if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, even whena door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door is opened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.


LIGHTING 167

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY,or using Retained AccessoryPower (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and the interiorlamps turn on briefly at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when K ispressed on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter. When a door isopened, the interior lamps come on ifthe dome lamp control is in the DOORposition. After about 30 seconds theexterior lamps turn off. Entry lightingcan be disabled manually by changingthe ignition out of the OFF position,or by pressing the RKE transmitter Qbutton.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” under VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps and interiorlamps come on at night, or in areaswith limited lighting, when the driverdoor is opened after the ignition isturned off. The exterior lamps and


168 LIGHTING

interior lamps remain on for a setamount of time, then automaticallyturn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 150.

Battery Load ManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), which estimatesthe battery's temperature and state ofcharge. It then adjusts the voltage forbest performance and extended life ofthe battery.

When the battery's state of charge islow, the voltage is raised slightly toquickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to preventovercharging. The voltmeter gauge orthe voltage display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), if equipped,may show the voltage moving up ordown. This is normal. If there is aproblem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idleif the electrical loads are very high.This is true for all vehicles. This isbecause the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough atidle to produce all the power that isneeded for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,rear window defogger, climate controlfan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loadsplugged into accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reduce thepower demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in stepsor levels, without being noticeable. Inrare cases at the highest levels ofcorrective action, this action may benoticeable to the driver. If so, a DICmessage might be displayed and it is

recommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome andreading lamps if they are left on formore than 10 minutes when theignition is off. This will keep thebattery from running down.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition is turnedoff, if the parking lamps or headlampshave been manually left on. Thisprotects against draining the battery.To restart the 10-minute timer, turnthe exterior lamp control to the Oposition and then back to the; or2 position.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be on orin ACC/ACCESSORY.


INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 169

Infotainment System

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE), andvoice or speech recognition. It alsoincludes information on settings.


170 CLIMATE CONTROLS

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Rear Climate Control System . . . . 174

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic ClimateControl SystemThe climate control buttons on thecenter stack and on the climatecontrol display are used to adjust theheating, cooling, and ventilation.

Center Stack Climate Controls


2. Fan Control

3. OFF (Fan)

4. Driver and Passenger Heated andCooled Seats (If Equipped)

5. Recirculation

6. Rear Window Defogger

7. Defrost





3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)

6. Climate Control Selection(Application Tray Button)


CLIMATE CONTROLS 171

7. Rear (Rear Climate ControlTouch Screen)



The fan, air delivery mode, airconditioning, driver and passengertemperatures, and SYNC settings canbe controlled by pressing CLIMATE onthe infotainment home screen or theclimate button on the infotainmentdisplay application tray. A selectioncan then be made on the front climatecontrol page displayed. See theinfotainment manual.

Climate Control Status Display

The climate control status displayappears briefly when the climatecontrol buttons on the center stackare adjusted. The air delivery modecan be adjusted on the climate controldisplay.

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controls thefan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle to thedesired temperature.

When AUTO is lit, all four functionsoperate automatically. Each functioncan also be manually set and thesetting is displayed. Functions notmanually set will continue to beautomatically controlled, even if theAUTO indicator is not lit.

For automatic operation:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature as neededfor best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and to coolthe vehicle faster, recirculation may beautomatically selected in warmweather. The recirculation light willnot come on. Press@ to selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the instrumentcluster. See “Cluster Settings Menu”under Instrument Cluster 0 129.

OFF : Press OFF to turn the fan on oroff. When off is selected, the systemwill stop air from flowing into thecabin. If on is selected, any otherbuttons are pressed, or any knobs areturned, the climate control system willturn on and operate at the currentsetting.

w /x : The temperature can beadjusted separately for the driver andthe passenger. Press to increase ordecrease the temperature. Press andhold to rapidly increase or decreasethe temperature.

The driver and passengertemperatures can also be adjusted bytouching the controls on the climatecontrol display.



SYNC : Touch SYNC on the climatecontrol display to link all climate zonesettings to the driver settings. Adjustthe driver side temperature control tochange the linked temperature. Whenthe passenger settings are adjusted,the SYNC button is displayed whenthe temperatures are unlinked.

Rear : If equipped, touch Rear on thefront climate control display to openthe rear climate control screen. Therear climate control settings can nowbe adjusted from the frontpassenger area.

Manual Operation

z9y : Touch the fan controls onthe climate control display or pressthe fan control buttons, to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Touch or pressand hold the fan controls to adjustspeed more quickly. The fan speedsetting displays. Any adjustment ofthe fan speed cancels automatic fancontrol and the fan can be controlledmanually. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation.

To turn off the fan and climatecontrol system, press OFF on thecenter stack climate controls. The

airflow will be blocked from enteringin all air delivery modes, exceptdefrost.

The maximum automatic fan speedcan be set to low, medium, or high. Toadjust Auto Fan Max Speed, see“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization 0 150.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Whenthe climate information is displayed,press the desired air delivery mode onthe climate control display to changethe direction of the airflow. Theselected air delivery mode button islit. Pressing any of the air deliverybuttons cancels automatic air deliverycontrol and the direction of theairflow can be controlled manually.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y : Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ : Air is divided between theinstrument panel outlets and the flooroutlets.

[ : Air is directed to the flooroutlets.

- : Clears the windows of fog ormoisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 : Clears the windshield of fog orfrost more quickly. Air is directed tothe windshield. Press0 to turn on oroff. Changing the air delivery modealso turns the defrost off.

A/C Mode : Touch AC Mode on theclimate control display to turn theautomatic air conditioning on or off.If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioner will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditioner runsas needed.

Automatic Air Recirculation : Whenthe AUTO indicator light is on, the airis automatically recirculated asneeded to help quickly cool the insideof the vehicle.

The climate control system may havea sensor to detect air pollution. Whenusing automatic air recirculation, the



air quality control system mayoperate. To adjust the sensitivity ofthe air quality sensor, see “Climateand Air Quality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

@ : Press to alternate betweenrecirculating air inside the vehicle orpulling in outside air. The indicatorlight on the button is lit whenrecirculation mode is active. Thishelps to quickly cool the air inside thevehicle and reduce the entry ofoutside air and odors.

Pressing this button cancels automaticrecirculation. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation; recirculationruns automatically as needed.

Manual recirculation mode is notavailable when in Defrost or Defogmodes.

Auto Defog : The climate controlsystem uses a sensor to automaticallydetect high humidity inside thevehicle. When high humidity isdetected, the climate control systemmay adjust to outside air supply, turnon the air conditioner, and directmore air to the windshield. If theclimate control system does not

detect possible window fogging, itreturns to normal operation. To turnAuto Defog off or on, see “Climate andAir Quality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

Rear Window Defogger

K : Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The rear window defogger only workswhen the ignition is on. The defoggerturns off if the ignition is turned offor to ACC/ACCESSORY.

The rear window defogger can be setto automatic operation. When AutoRear Defog is selected, the rearwindow defogger turns onautomatically when the vehicle is firststarted in cold weather and turns offwhen the vehicle is warmed. To turnAuto Rear Defog on or off, see“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization 0 150.

If equipped, the heated outsidemirrors turn on when the rear windowdefogger button is on and help toclear fog or frost from the surface ofthe mirrors.

Caution

Do not try to clear frost or othermaterial from the inside of thefront windshield and rear windowwith a razor blade or anything elsethat is sharp. This may damage therear window defogger grid andaffect the radio's ability to pick upstations clearly. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Driver and Passenger Heated andCooled Seats : If equipped, pressIor+ to heat the driver or passengerseatback only.

If equipped, press J or z to heat thedriver or passenger seat cushion andseatback.



If equipped, press C or { to cool thedriver or passenger seat. See Heatedand Cooled Front Seats 0 66.

The vehicle also has auto heated andcooled seats that turn on when thevehicle is on. The seats will activate atthe level required by the vehicle’sinterior temperature. The auto heatedand cooled seats can be turned on oroff.See Vehicle Personalization 0 150 andHeated and Cooled Front Seats 0 66.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation : If equipped with theremote start feature, the climatecontrol system may run when thevehicle is started remotely. The systemuses the driver’s previous settings toheat or cool the inside of the vehicle.The rear defog may come on duringremote start based on cold ambientconditions. The rear defog indicatorlight does not come on during aremote start. If equipped with heatedor cooled seats, they may come onduring a remote start.See Remote Vehicle Start 0 36 andHeated and Cooled Front Seats 0 66.

Sensor

The solar sensor, on top of theinstrument panel near the windshield,monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed, recirculation,and air delivery mode for bestcomfort.

If the sensor is covered, the automaticclimate control system may not workproperly.

Rear Climate ControlSystemIf equipped, the rear climate controlsystem is on the rear of the centerconsole. The settings can be adjustedwith the rear climate controls and therear climate display.

Rear Climate Controls

1. Heated Rear Seats


3. Temperature Control

4. Fan Control

5. O (On/Off)




Rear Climate Display


2. Rear Climate TemperatureControl

3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperatures)

5. REAR O (On/Off)

6. Rear AUTO (AutomaticOperation)

7. Front (Front Climate ControlTouch Screen)

8. Rear Control Lockout


Rear : Touch Rear on the frontclimate control display to open therear climate control screen. The rearclimate control settings can now beadjusted from the frontpassenger area.

O : Press O or REAR O to turn therear climate control system on or off.If the rear climate control system isturned off using REAR O on the rear

climate display, the O button and thetemperature or air delivery modebuttons on the rear climate controlsmust be pressed within five secondsto turn it back on.

SYNC : Touch SYNC on the rearclimate display to match the rearclimate control temperature to thefront climate control drivertemperature. The SYNC button will belit. Press the temperature, MODE,or AUTO button twice to unlink theset driver and rear temperatures. TheSYNC button turns off.

Rear Control Lockout : Touch RearControl Lockout on the rear climatedisplay to lock or unlock control ofthe rear climate control system fromthe front climate control display.

When locked the rear climate controlsystem cannot be adjusted from therear climate controls on the rear ofthe center console.

Automatic Operation

Rear AUTO : Touch to turn on or off.The air delivery and fan speed arecontrolled automatically. The AUTOindicator appears on the display onthe rear of the center console. If theMode or fan control buttons aremanually adjusted, this cancels theautomatic operation.

Manual Operation

A«/ªAª : Touch or press thefan controls on the rear climatedisplay or on the rear of the centerconsole to increase or decrease theairflow. PressingA« when thesystem is off will turn the system on.The air delivery mode remains in itsprevious setting.

w /x : Touch or press and hold therear temperature controls on the rearclimate display or on the rear of thecenter console to adjust the rearpassenger temperature. Pressw for



warmer air and pressx for cooler air.

Y/\/Y : Touch the desired modeon the rear climate display or theMODE button on the rear of thecenter console to change the directionof the airflow in the rear seating area.

M or L : Press M or L to heat theleft or right outboard seat cushion andseatback. See Heated Rear Seats 0 68.

Air VentsAdjustable air vents are in the centerand on the side of the instrumentpanel.

1. Slider Knob

2. Thumbwheel

Move the slider knobs (1) to changethe direction of the airflow.

Use the thumbwheels (2) near the airvents to open or close off the airflow.

Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow, or leavesfrom the air inlets at the base ofthe windshield that could blockthe flow of air into the vehicle.

. Clear snow off the hood toimprove visibility and helpdecrease moisture drawn into thevehicle.

. When you enter a vehicle in coldweather, press the fan up buttonto the maximum fan level beforedriving. This helps clear the intakeducts of snow and moisture, andreduces the chance of fogging theinside of the window.

. Keep the air path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affect theperformance of the system. Checkwith your dealer before addingequipment to the outside of thevehicle.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces the dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 341. To findout what type of filter to use, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts 0 350.

1. Before opening the glove box,remove the two lower screws(out of view).

2. Open the glove box completelyand remove the two upperscrews.

3. Disconnect the electrical plugand remove the entire glove box.

4. Release the two tabs holding theservice door. Open the servicedoor and remove the old filter.

5. Install the new air filter.

6. Close the service door and securethe tabs.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall theglove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.


178 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . 186Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 187Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . 189Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . . 200Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 202Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

BrakesAntilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . 211Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . . 217Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Automatic Level Control . . . . . . . . . 218

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . 220

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . 228Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . 239Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . 239Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . 241

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243California Fuel Requirements . . . . 244Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . 244Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246


DRIVING AND OPERATING 179

Trailer TowingGeneral Towing Information . . . . 247Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . 255

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On Electrical Equipment . . . 257

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many forms andcan take your focus from the task ofdriving. Exercise good judgment anddo not let other activities divert yourattention away from the road. Manylocal governments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, keep youreyes on the road, keep your hands onthe steering wheel, and focus yourattention on driving.

. Do not use a phone in demandingdriving situations. Use ahands-free method to place orreceive necessary phone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read, takenotes, or look up information onphones or other electronic devices.

. Designate a front seat passengerto handle potential distractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings. Programall trip information into anynavigation device prior to driving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parked toretrieve items that have fallen tothe floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tend tochildren.

. Keep pets in an appropriate carrieror restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.



Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The first stepin driving defensively is to wear theseat belt. See Seat Belts 0 75.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by even asmall amount of alcohol. You canhave a serious — or even fatal —collision if you drive after drinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and accelerating areimportant factors in helping to controla vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time is aboutthree-quarters of a second. In thattime, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), whichcould be a lot of distance in anemergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brake normallybut do not pump the brakes. Doing socould make the pedal harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willbe some power brake assist but it willbe used when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and the brakepedal will be harder to push.



Steering

Electric Power Steering

This vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenance isnot required.

If power steering assist is lost due to asystem malfunction, the vehicle canbe steered, but may require increasedeffort.

See your dealer if there is a problem.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time while thevehicle is not moving, power assistmay be reduced.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when the systemcools down.

See your dealer if there is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out of thecurve before accelerating gentlyinto the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem may bemore effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of the steeringwheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can drop offthe edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile driving. Follow these tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way,steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.



Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid — toomuch speed or steering in a curvecauses tires to slip and losecornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids bytaking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off the acceleratorpedal and steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust your drivingaccording to weather conditions.Stopping distance can be longerand vehicle control can be affectedwhen traction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or other materialon the road. Learn to recognizewarning clues — such as enoughwater, ice, or packed snow on theroad to make a mirrored surface— and slow down when you haveany doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking, includingreducing vehicle speed by shiftingto a lower gear. Any suddenchanges could cause the tires toslide.

Remember: Antilock brakes help avoidonly the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingFour-wheel-drive vehicles can be usedfor off-road driving. Vehicles withoutfour-wheel drive and vehicles notequipped with All Terrain (AT) orOn-Off Road (OOR) tires must not bedriven off-road except on a level, solid

surface. For contact information aboutthe original equipment tires, see thewarranty manual.

One of the best ways for successfuloff-road driving is to control thespeed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction caneasily throw you out of position.This could cause you to lose controland crash. You and your passengersshould always wear seat belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.

. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,and check inflation pressure in alltires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.



. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary to removethe front fascia lower air dam,if equipped. However, driving withoutthe air dam reduces fuel economy.

Caution

Operating the vehicle for extendedperiods without the front fascialower air dam installed can causeimproper airflow to the engine.Reattach the front fascia air damafter off-road driving.

Loading the Vehicle for Off-RoadDriving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or your

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargo areaas far forward and as low aspossible. The heaviest thingsshould be on the floor,forward of the rear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits0 189 and Tires 0 293.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife.

. Do not park over things that burn.See Parking over Things That Burn0 200.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steep forany vehicle. Driving up hills cancause the vehicle to stall. Drivingdown hills can cause loss of control.Driving across hills can cause arollover. You could be injured orkilled. Do not drive on steep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, and obstructions.If the terrain ahead cannot be seen,get out of the vehicle and walk the hillbefore driving further.

When driving on hills:



. Use a low gear and keep a firmgrip on the steering wheel.

. Maintain a slow speed.

. When possible, drive straight upor down the hill.

. Slow down when approaching thetop of the hill.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident. Therecould be a drop-off, embankment,cliff, or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured or killed.As you near the top of a hill, slowdown and stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

{ Warning

If the vehicle has the two-speedautomatic or electronic transfercase, shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause your vehicleto roll even if the transmission is inP (Park). This is because theN (Neutral) position on the transfercase overrides the transmission.You or someone else could beinjured. If leaving the vehicle, setthe parking brake and shift thetransmission to P (Park). Shift thetransfer case to any position butN (Neutral).

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straight down.Use a low gear because the enginewill work with the brakes to slowthe vehicle and help keep thevehicle under control.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going down ahill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This could causeloss of control and you or otherscould be injured or killed. Apply thebrakes lightly when descending ahill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.

. If driving uphill when thevehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle, itis steep enough to cause it toroll over.



. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to a lowergear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straightdown the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot be restartedafter stalling, set the parkingbrake, shift into P (Park), andturn the vehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill. A hillthat can be driven straight up ordown might be too steep to driveacross. Driving across an incline

puts more weight on the downhillwheels, which could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass can causethe tires to slip sideways, downhill.If the vehicle slips sideways, it canhit something that will trip it — arock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rut ordepression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicle andprevent the side slipping.

{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If thevehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed. Always get out onthe uphill side of the vehicle andstay well clear of the rollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving in mud— the deeper the mud, the lower thegear. Keep the vehicle moving to avoidgetting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tires tendto sink into the sand. This affectssteering, accelerating, and braking.Drive at a reduced speed and avoidsharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snow and ice.



{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstream andyou and your passengers coulddrown. If it is only shallow water, itcan still wash away the groundfrom under your tires. Tractioncould be lost, and the vehicle couldroll over. Do not drive throughrushing water.

Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive through it slowly. At fasterspeeds, water can get into the engineand cause it to stall. Stalling canoccur if the exhaust pipe is underwater. Do not turn off the ignitionwhen driving through water. If theexhaust pipe is under water, theengine will not start. When goingthrough water, the brakes get wet andit may take longer to stop. See“Driving on Wet Roads” later in thissection.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris that hascollected on the underbody or chassis,or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, havethe brake linings cleaned and checked.These substances can cause glazingand uneven braking. Check the bodystructure, driveline, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaustsystem for damage and check the fuellines and cooling system for anyleakage.

More frequent maintenance service isrequired. See the Maintenance Schedule0 341.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicletraction and affect your ability to stopand accelerate. Always drive slower inthese types of driving conditions andavoid driving through large puddlesand deep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes. Theymight not work as well in a quickstop and could cause pulling to oneside. You could lose control of thevehicle.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

After driving through a large puddleof water or a car/vehicle wash,lightly apply the brake pedal untilthe brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and be verycautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water canbuild up under the vehicle's tires sothey actually ride on the water. Thiscan happen if the road is wet enoughand you are going fast enough. Whenthe vehicle is hydroplaning, it haslittle or no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wiping equipmentin good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with proper treaddepth. See Tires 0 293.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than driving onflat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow the vehicleon a long downhill slope can causebrake overheating, can reduce brakeperformance, and could result in aloss of braking. Shift thetransmission to a lower gear to letthe engine assist the brakes on asteep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) orwith the ignition off is dangerous.This can cause overheating of thebrakes and loss of steering assist.Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills; somethingcould be in your lane (e.g., stalledcar, accident).



. Pay attention to special road signs(e.g., falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires and theroad creates less traction or grip, sodrive carefully. Wet ice can occur atabout 0 °C (32 °F) when freezing rainbegins to fall. Avoid driving on wet iceor in freezing rain until roads can betreated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 214.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops, but the brakes should

be applied sooner than when ondry pavement. See Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) 0 211.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas. Thesurface of a curve or an overpasscan remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. Avoidsudden steering maneuvers andbraking while on ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stay with the vehicle unless there ishelp nearby. If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Service 0 360.To get help and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside. Engineexhaust contains carbon monoxide(CO), which cannot be seen orsmelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle side thatis away from the wind, tobring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and set thefan speed to the highestsetting. See “Climate ControlSystems.”

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

For more information about CO, seeEngine Exhaust 0 201.

To save fuel, run the engine for shortperiods to warm the vehicle and thenshut the engine off and partially closethe window. Moving about to keepwarm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idle speed.This keeps the battery charged torestart the vehicle and to signal forhelp with the headlamps. Do this aslittle as possible, to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin the wheelsto free the vehicle when stuck in sand,mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 214.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. The vehiclecan overheat, causing an enginecompartment fire or other damage.Spin the wheels as little as possibleand avoid going above 56 km/h(35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out

Turn the steering wheel left and rightto clear the area around the frontwheels. Turn off any traction system.Shift back and forth betweenR (Reverse) and a low forward gear,spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears. Releasethe accelerator pedal while shifting,and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is ingear. Slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, it

might need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 326.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle can carry.This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes theweight of all occupants, cargo, andall nonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and theCertification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). This can causesystems to break and change

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the way the vehicle handles.This could cause loss of controland a crash. Overloading canalso reduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The tire and loading

information label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel also shows the size of theoriginal equipment tires (3) andthe recommended cold tireinflation pressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires 0 293 and Tire Pressure0 299.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity. Forexample, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs. and therewill be five 150 lb passengersin your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)



5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 250 for importantinformation on towing a trailer,towing safety rules, and trailering tips.

Example 1

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

3. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)

Example 2

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)



Example 3

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceed thevehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to theB-pillar. The label may show thesize of the vehicle's original tiresand the inflation pressures neededto obtain the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle. This iscalled Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label mayalso show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads onthe front and rear axles, weigh thevehicle at a weigh station. Yourdealer can help with this. Be sureto spread the load equally on bothsides of the center line.

The warranty does not cover partsor components that fail because ofoverloading.

The label will help determine howmuch cargo and installedequipment the vehicle can carry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change theweight ratings. Ask your dealer tohelp load the vehicle properly.



{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop or turn,or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavier things,like suitcases, inside thevehicle so that some ofthem are above the tops ofthe seats.

. Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in thevehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading theVehicle for Off-Road Driving”under Off-Road Driving 0 182.

Add-On Equipment

There may be a limit on howmany people can be inside thevehicle when carrying removableitems. Be sure to weigh the vehiclebefore buying and installing thenew equipment.

Caution

Overloading the vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)of the front or rear axle.

Automatic Level Control

See Automatic Level Control 0 218.

If a weight-distributing hitch isbeing used, it is recommended toallow the shocks to inflate,thereby leveling the vehicle priorto adjusting the height. See“Hitches” under Towing Equipment0 253.



Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500 mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200 mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing0 250 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicle andmore information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

The pedals can only be adjusted whenthe vehicle is in P (Park).

Press the top of the switch to movethe pedals closer to your body. Pressthe bottom of the switch to move thepedals away.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settings besaved and recalled. See Memory Seats0 63.



Ignition Positions

The vehicle is equipped with KeylessAccess and has pushbutton start.

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter must be in the vehicle forthe system to operate. If thepushbutton start is not working, thevehicle may be near a strong radioantenna signal causing interference tothe Keyless Access system. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 29.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY,and the brake pedal must be applied.

Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF (NoIndicator Lights) : When the vehicleis stopped, press ENGINE START/STOP once to turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 199.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display the messageSHIFT TO PARK in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). When thevehicle is shifted into P (Park), theignition will turn off.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brake andsteering systems and disable theairbags.

The vehicle may have an electricsteering column lock. The lock isactivated when the ignition is turnedoff and either front door is opened.A sound may be heard as the lockactuates or releases. The steeringcolumn lock may not release with thewheels turned off center. If this

happens, the vehicle may not start.Move the steering wheel from left toright while attempting to start thevehicle. If this does not work, thevehicle needs service.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shift toP (Park), and turn the ignitionoff. On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in P (Park) to turnthe ignition off.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake 0 212 orParking Brake 0 211.



{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut the vehicleoff in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold ENGINE START/STOPfor longer than two seconds, or presstwice in five seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber IndicatorLight) : This mode allows someelectrical accessories to be used whenthe engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to off after five minutesto prevent battery rundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, and thebrake pedal applied, pressing thebutton once will turn the ignition on.Once engine cranking begins, releasethe button. Engine cranking willcontinue until the engine starts. SeeStarting the Engine 0 196. The ignitionwill then remain on.

Service Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and to verifythe proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as may berequired for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, and thebrake pedal not applied, pressing andholding the button for more thanfive seconds will place the vehicle inService Mode. The instruments andaudio systems will operate as they dowhen the ignition is on, but thevehicle will not be able to be driven.The engine will not start in ServiceMode. Press the button again to turnthe ignition off.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could change theway the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. SeeAdd-On Electrical Equipment 0 257.



Starting Procedure

1. With the Keyless Access system,the RKE transmitter must be inthe vehicle. Press ENGINESTART/STOP with the brakepedal applied. When the enginebegins cranking, let go of thebutton.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it.

If the RKE transmitter is not inthe vehicle, if there isinterference, or if the RKEbattery is low, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) willdisplay a message.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18 °Cor 0 °F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you press ENGINE START/STOP, for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the button, and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine and

transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Engine Heater

{ Warning

Do not plug in the engine blockheater while the vehicle is parked ina garage or under a carport.Property damage or personal injurymay result. Always park the vehiclein a clear open area away frombuildings or structures.

If equipped, the engine heater canprovide easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up incold weather conditions at or below−18 °C (0 °F). Vehicles with an engineheater should be plugged in at leastfour hours before starting. There maybe an internal thermostat in the plugend of the cord, which will preventengine heater operation attemperatures above −18 °C (0 °F).



To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord is by theleft front fender, next to theengine compartment fuse block.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, do notuse it. See your dealer for areplacement. Inspect the cord fordamage yearly.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cord oran extension cord can damage thecord and may result in overheatingand fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protected bya ground fault detection

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

function. An ungroundedoutlet could cause an electricshock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extension cordin good operating condition,or using a damaged heater orextension cord, could make itoverheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. Possible heater cordand thermostat damage couldoccur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattach thecover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord. Keepthe cord away from anymoving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store the cordas it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If youdo not, it could be damaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends on severalfactors. Ask a dealer in the area whereyou will be parking the vehicle for thebest advice on this.



Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)Some vehicle accessories may be usedafter the ignition is turned off.

The power windows and sunroof,if equipped, will continue to work forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

The infotainment system will continueto work for 10 minutes, until thedriver door is opened, or until theignition is turned on or placed inACC/ACCESSORY.

Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle will

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

not move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If the vehicle has afour-wheel-drive transfer case witha N (Neutral) position, and thetransfer case is in N (Neutral), thevehicle will be free to roll, even ifthe shift lever is in P (Park). Be surethe transfer case is in a drive gear.If towing a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 247.

1. Hold the brake pedal down, thenset the parking brake.See Parking Brake 0 211 orElectric Parking Brake 0 212.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear – not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition off.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenly ifthe shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll, evenif the shift lever is in P (Park). So besure the transfer case is in a drivegear – not in N (Neutral).

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and the parkingbrake is firmly set before you leave it.



After you move the shift lever intoP (Park), hold the regular brake pedaldown. Then, see if you can move theshift lever away from P (Park) withoutfirst pulling it toward you. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and you donot shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in the transmission.You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of P (Park). This iscalled torque lock. To prevent torquelock, set the parking brake and thenshift into P (Park) properly before youleave the driver seat.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl inthe transmission. You will then beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release system isdesigned to prevent movement of theshift lever out of P (Park), unless theignition is on and the brake pedal isapplied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 322.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever all theway into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under the vehicleand ignite. Do not park over papers,leaves, dry grass, or other thingsthat can burn.

Active Fuel ManagementThis system allows the engine tooperate on either all or half of itscylinders, depending on the drivingconditions.



When less power is required, such ascruising at a constant vehicle speed,the system will operate in the halfcylinder mode, allowing the vehicle toachieve better fuel economy. Whengreater power demands are required,such as accelerating from a stop,passing, or merging onto a freeway,the system will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

Extended ParkingIt is best not to park with the vehiclerunning. If the vehicle is left running,be sure it will not move and there isadequate ventilation.See Shifting Into Park 0 199 and EngineExhaust 0 201.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter outside thevehicle, it will turn off after one hour.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the RKE transmitterinside the vehicle, it will turn off aftertwo hours.

The vehicle could turn off sooner if itis parked on a hill, due to lack ofavailable fuel.

The timer will reset if the vehicle istaken out of P (Park) while it isrunning.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areas withpoor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells or soundsstrange or different.

. The exhaust system leaks dueto corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or ifit is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosed areasuch as a garage or a building thathas no fresh air ventilation.

Running the Vehicle WhileParkedIt is better not to park with the enginerunning.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 199 and EngineExhaust 0 201.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 247.

Automatic TransmissionIf equipped, there is an electronic shiftlever position indicator within theinstrument cluster. This display comeson when the ignition is turned on.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode 0 205.

P : This position locks the drivewheels. Use P (Park) when starting theengine because the vehicle cannotmove easily. When parked on a hill,especially when the vehicle has aheavy load, you might notice anincrease in the effort to shift out ofP (Park). See “Torque Lock” underShifting Into Park 0 199.



{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others couldbe injured. To be sure the vehiclewill not move, even when you areon fairly level ground, always setthe parking brake and move theshift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 199 andDriving Characteristics and TowingTips 0 247.

{ Warning

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll — even ifthe shift lever is in P (Park) — if thetransfer case is in N (Neutral). So,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear, Two-Wheel Drive Highor Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low — not inN (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park0 199.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicle isstopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see If theVehicle Is Stuck 0 189.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart the engine when the vehicle isalready moving, use N (Neutral) only.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the engine runningat high speed may damage thetransmission. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.Be sure the engine is not running athigh speed when shifting thevehicle.



Caution

A transmission hot message maydisplay if the automatictransmission fluid is too hot.Driving under this condition candamage the vehicle. Stop and idlethe engine to cool the automatictransmission fluid. This messageclears when the transmission fluidhas cooled sufficiently.

D : This position is for normal driving.If more power is needed for passing,press the accelerator pedal down.

Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Modewhen towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills,or driving off-road. Shift thetransmission to a lower gear selectionif the transmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” under Lossof Control 0 182.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current driving

conditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making an upshift,if the engine is able to maintainvehicle speed by analyzing things suchas vehicle speed, throttle position, andvehicle load. If the shift stabilizationfeature determines that a currentvehicle speed cannot be maintained,the transmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this could appear to bea delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptive shiftcontrols. The adaptive shift controlprocess continually compares key shiftparameters to pre-programmed idealshifts stored in the transmission’scomputer. The transmissionconstantly makes adjustments toimprove vehicle performanceaccording to how the vehicle is beingused, such as with a heavy load orwhen the temperature changes.During this adaptive shift controlprocess, shifting might feel differentas the transmission determines thebest settings.

When temperatures are very cold, thetransmission's gear shifting could bedelayed providing more stable shiftsuntil the engine warms up. Shiftscould be more noticeable with a coldtransmission. This difference inshifting is normal.

L : This position allows selection of arange of gears appropriate for currentdriving conditions. If equipped, see“Range Selection Mode” under ManualMode 0 205.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill usingonly the accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission. Therepair will not be covered by thevehicle warranty. If the vehicle isstuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.



Normal Mode Grade Braking

This mode is enabled when thevehicle is started, but is not enabledin Range Selection Mode. It assists inmaintaining desired vehicle speedswhen driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmission toslow the vehicle. The first time thesystem engages for each ignitioncycle, a DIC message will be displayed.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition cycle, press and hold theTow/Haul button for five seconds.When the button is released, therequested mode change is made.A DIC message displays.

For other forms of grade braking, seeTow/Haul Mode 0 206 and CruiseControl 0 218.

Kickdown Mode

The accelerator pedal provides anadditional downshift after pressingthrough the kickdown feature.

It requires extra pedal pressure nearthe end of its travel to engage.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer byletting you select a desired range ofgears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toL (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttons onthe shift lever to select thedesired range of gears for currentdriving conditions. Or, hold theplus/minus buttons to select thehighest or lowest range availablefor the current vehicle speed.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), anumber displays next to the L,indicating the current transmissionrange.

This number is the highest gear thatthe transmission will command whileoperating in L (Manual Mode). Allgears below that number are available.As driving conditions change, thetransmission can automatically shiftto lower gears. For example, when5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through5 (Fifth) gears are automaticallyshifted by the transmission, but6 (Sixth) cannot be used until theplus/minus button on the shift lever isused to change to the range.

In vehicles with gasoline engines,when the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), adownshift may occur. The gear thatthe transmission is operating in whenthe shift lever is moved from D (Drive)to L (Manual Mode) determines if adownshift occurs. See the followingchart.



Gear before shifting from D (Drive) toL (Manual Mode)

10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range after shifting from D (Drive) to L (ManualMode) - Tow/Haul not engaged

L7 L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L2 L1

Range after shifting from D (Drive) to L (ManualMode) - Tow/Haul engaged

L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L3 L2 L1

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active. SeeTow/Haul Mode 0 206.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/Haul Modecan be used.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill usingonly the accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission. Therepair will not be covered by thevehicle warranty. If the vehicle isstuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.

Tow/Haul Mode

The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling. This provides increasedperformance, vehicle control, andenhanced transmission and engine

cooling when driving down steep hillsor mountain grades, towing,or hauling heavy loads.

The selector button is on the end ofthe shift lever. Turn the Tow/HaulMode on and off by pressing thebutton. When the Tow/Haul Mode isenabled, a light on the instrumentcluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 138 andHill and Mountain Roads 0 187.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underDriver Mode Control 0 216.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking is onlyenabled while the Tow/Haul Mode isselected and the vehicle is not in theRange Selection Mode. See “Tow/Haul



Mode” listed previously and ManualMode 0 205. Tow/Haul Mode GradeBraking assists in maintaining desiredvehicle speeds when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow the vehicle.

To disable or enable Tow/Haul GradeBraking within the current ignitioncycle, press and hold the Tow/Haulbutton for five seconds. When thebutton is released, the requested modechange is made. A DIC message isdisplayed.

See Towing Equipment 0 253.

For other forms of grade braking, seeAutomatic Transmission 0 202 andCruise Control 0 218.

Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, four-wheel drive engagesthe front axle for extra traction.

Caution

Do not drive on clean, dry

pavement in 4 m and 4 n (ifequipped) for an extended period oftime. These conditions may causepremature wear on the vehicle’spowertrain.

Driving on clean, dry pavement in 4 mor 4 n may:

. Cause a vibration to be felt in thesteering system.

. Cause tires to wear faster.

. Make the transfer case harder toshift, and cause it to run noisier.

{ Warning

If equipped with four-wheel drive,the vehicle will be free to roll if thetransfer case is in N (Neutral), evenwhen the shift lever is in P (Park).Be sure the transfer case is in a

drive gear — 2 m, 4 m, or 4 n — notin N (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park0 199.

Caution

Extended high-speed operation in 4n may damage or shorten the life ofthe drivetrain.

Engagement noise and bump whenshifting between 4 n and 4 m or fromN (Neutral), with the engine running,is normal.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 214.



Automatic Transfer Case

If equipped, use the transfer case knobnext to the steering wheel to shift intoand out of four-wheel drive.

All of the lights will blink on then offmomentarily when the ignition isturned on. The light that remains onwill indicate the state of thetransfer case.

If the indicator mark on the switchdoes not match up with the light thenthat likely means the switch wasmoved when the ignition was off.

The indicator mark on the switchmust line up with the indicator lightbefore a shift can be commanded. To

command a shift rotate the transfercase switch to the new desiredposition. The light will blink meaningthat the shift is in progress. When theshift is completed the new positionwill be illuminated. If the transfer casecannot complete a shift command, itwill go back to its last chosen setting.

The settings are:

N (Neutral) : Use only when thevehicle needs to be towed.See Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 326or Towing the Vehicle 0 326.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Use fordriving on most streets and highways.The front axle is not engaged. Thissetting provides the best fueleconomy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : Use when road surfacetraction conditions are variable. Whendriving in AUTO, the front axle isengaged, and the vehicle's power issent to the front and rear wheelsautomatically based on drivingconditions. This setting providesslightly lower fuel economy than 2 m.

Do not use AUTO mode, if equipped,to park on a steep grade with poortraction such as ice, snow, mud,or gravel. In AUTO mode only the rearwheels will hold the vehicle fromsliding when parked. If parking on asteep grade, use 4 m to keep all fourwheels engaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis position when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, when off-roading,or when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Thissetting engages the front axle anddelivers extra torque. Choose 4 n whendriving off-road in deep sand, deepmud, or deep snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 214.



Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO

Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTOposition at any speed, except from 4 n.The indicator light will flash whileshifting and will remain on when theshift is completed.

Shifting Into 2 m

Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed,

except when shifting from 4 n. Theindicator light will flash while shiftingand will remain on when the shift iscompleted.

Shifting Into 4 n

When 4 n is engaged, keep vehiclespeed below 72 km/h (45 mph).

To shift:

1. The ignition must be on and thevehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission inN (Neutral). It is best for thevehicle to be moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for

the 4 n indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested mode indicatorlight has stopped flashing coulddamage the transfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the4 n indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete the shift.After 30 seconds the transfer case willshift to 4 m. Turn the knob to 4 m todisplay the indicator. With the vehiclemoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph), andthe transmission in N (Neutral),attempt the shift again.

Shifting Out of 4 nTo shift:

1. The vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission in

N (Neutral) and the ignition on.It is best for the vehicle to bemoving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO, or2 m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO, or2 m indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested mode indicatorlight has stopped flashing coulddamage the transfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator light willflash for 30 seconds but will notcomplete the shift. With the vehiclemoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph), andthe transmission in N (Neutral),attempt the shift again.



Shifting Into N (Neutral)

To shift into N (Neutral):

1. Park the vehicle on a levelsurface.

2. Set the parking brake and pressand hold the brake pedal. SeeElectric Parking Brake 0 212 orParking Brake 0 211.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition on.

4. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.6. Turn the transfer case knob

clockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least 10 seconds.Then slowly release the knob tothe 4 n position. The N (Neutral)light will come on when thetransfer case shift to N (Neutral)is complete.

7. With the engine running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse), thenshift the transmission toD (Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting the transmission.

8. Turn the engine off, and theignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

9. Place the transmission shift leverin P (Park). See RecreationalVehicle Towing 0 326.

10. Turn the ignition off.

Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift out of N (Neutral):

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Press and hold START/STOP for5 seconds with your foot off thebrake to place the vehicle inService Mode.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn the transfer case knob tothe desired setting.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to the desired gear.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has an Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronicbraking system that helps prevent abraking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself. A momentarymotor or clicking noise may be heardwhile this test is going on, and it mayeven be noticed that the brake pedalmoves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 138.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking to avoid

a sudden obstacle, a computer sensesthe wheels are slowing down. If one ofthe wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure toeach wheel, as required, faster thanany driver could. This can help yousteer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updates onwheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change thetime needed to get a foot up to thebrake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get too closeto the vehicle in front of you, therewill not be enough time to apply thebrakes if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave enough roomup ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just hold thebrake pedal down firmly and let ABSwork. You may hear the ABS pump ormotor operating and feel the brakepedal pulsate. This is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brake atthe same time. In many emergencies,steering can help more than even thevery best braking.

Parking Brake



Set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brake systemwarning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light 0 137.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system andcause premature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

To release the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, then pushdown momentarily on the parkingbrake pedal until you feel the pedalrelease. Slowly pull your foot up offthe parking brake pedal. If the parkingbrake is not released when you beginto drive, a DIC message will appearand a chime will sound warning youthat the parking brake is still on.

Electric Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The EPB can always beactivated, even if the ignition is off. Toprevent draining the battery, avoidrepeated cycles of the EPB systemwhen the engine is not running.

The system has aY or PARK

Electric Parking Brake light, and a 8Service Parking Brake light.See Electric Parking Brake Light 0 137and Service Electric Parking Brake Light0 138.

Before leaving the vehicle, check fortheY or PARK light to ensure thatthe parking brake is applied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at acomplete stop.

2. Lift up the EPB switchmomentarily.

TheY or PARK light will flash andthen stay on once the EPB is fullyapplied. If theY or PARK lightflashes continuously, then the EPB isonly partially applied or there is aproblem with the EPB. A DIC messagewill display. Release the EPB and tryto apply it again. If the light does notcome on, or keeps flashing, have thevehicle serviced. Do not drive thevehicle if theY or PARK light isflashing. See your dealer. See ElectricParking Brake Light 0 137.



If the 8 light is on, press the EPBswitch and hold it. Continue to holdthe switch until theY or PARK light

remains on. If the 8 light remains on,see your dealer.

If the EPB is applied while the vehicleis moving, the vehicle will decelerateas long as the switch is pressed. If theswitch is pressed until the vehiclecomes to a stop, the EPB will remainapplied.

The vehicle may automatically applythe EPB in some situations when thevehicle is not moving. This is normal,and is done to periodically check thecorrect operation of the EPB system.

If the EPB fails to apply, block the rearwheels to prevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB:


2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Press the EPB switchmomentarily.

The EPB is released when theY orPARK light is off.

If the 8 light is on, release the EPB bypressing and holding the EPB switch.Continue to hold the switch until theY or PARK light is off. If either lightstays on after release is attempted, seeyour dealer.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system andcause premature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made to driveaway. Avoid rapid acceleration whenthe EPB is applied, to preserve parkingbrake lining life.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature is designed toassist the driver in stopping ordecreasing vehicle speed in emergencydriving conditions. This feature usesthe stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system under conditionswhere the driver has quickly andforcefully applied the brake pedal inan attempt to quickly stop or slowdown the vehicle. The stability systemhydraulic brake control moduleincreases brake pressure at eachcorner of the vehicle until the ABSactivates. Minor brake pedal pulsationor pedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver should continueto apply the brake pedal as the drivingsituation dictates. The Brake Assistfeature will automatically disengagewhen the brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.



Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade sufficient enough to activateHSA. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling, eitherforward or rearward, during vehicledrive off. After the driver completelystops and holds the vehicle in acomplete standstill on a grade, HSAwill be automatically activated. Duringthe transition period between whenthe driver releases the brake pedal andstarts to accelerate to drive off on agrade, HSA holds the braking pressurefor a maximum of two seconds toensure that there is no rolling. Thebrakes will automatically release whenthe accelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. It will notactivate if the vehicle is in a drive gearand facing downhill, or if the vehicleis facing uphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel spinand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses any of thedrive wheels are spinning or beginningto lose traction. When this happens,TCS applies the brakes to the spinningwheels and reduces engine power tolimit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when the vehiclesenses a difference between theintended path and the direction thevehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively applies brakingpressure to any one of the vehiclewheel brakes to assist the driver inkeeping the vehicle on the intendedpath. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is

also on automatically when thevehicle is started. See Trailer SwayControl (TSC) 0 255.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when road conditionsallow.

Both systems come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is started and beginsto move. The systems may be heard orfelt while they are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. This isnormal and does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessary toturn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If theVehicle Is Stuck 0 189 and “Turningthe Systems Off and On” later in thissection.

When the transfer case (if equipped)is in Four-Wheel Drive Low, thestability system is automaticallydisabled, g comes on, and theappropriate message will appear on



the DIC. Both traction control andStabiliTrak are automatically disabledin this condition.

The indicator light for both systems isin the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin

. Flash when StabiliTrak is activated

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on to indicatethat the system is inactive and is notassisting the driver in maintainingcontrol. The vehicle is safe to drive,but driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.


Drive the vehicle. If d comes on andstays on, the vehicle may need moretime to diagnose the problem. If thecondition persists, see your dealer.

Turning the Systems Off and On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrak ison the center stack.

Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS is off.The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease g. The traction off light idisplays in the instrument cluster. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC. To turn TCS on again, pressand release g. The traction off lighti displayed in the instrument clusterwill turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin when gis pressed, the system will not turn offuntil the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold g until the traction off

light i and the StabiliTrak OFF lightg come on and stay on in theinstrument cluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak on again,press and release g. The traction off

light i and the StabiliTrak OFF lightg in the instrument cluster turn off.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.



The vehicle has a Trailer Sway Control(TSC) feature and a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature.See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 255 orHill Start Assist (HSA) 0 214.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications 0 260.

Driver Mode ControlDriver Mode Control attempts to adda sportier feel, provide a morecomfortable ride, or assist in differentweather conditions or terrain. Thissystem simultaneously changes thesoftware settings of varioussub-systems. Depending on the optionpackage, available features, and modeselected, the suspension, steering, andpowertrain will change settings toachieve the desired modecharacteristics. If the vehicle isequipped with Magnetic Ride Control,selecting the various Driver Modesadjusts the ride of the vehicle toenhance the ride performance for theroad conditions and theselected mode.

The Driver Mode Control has fourmodes: Tour, Sport, Snow/Ice, andTow/Haul.

Press the Tow/Haul button to activateand deactivate the Tow/Haul Mode.

Press the MODE switch on the centerconsole to select Tour, Sport, or Snow/Ice. Pressing the switch will display agraphic of all available ride modes andchange to the next mode. The Tourand Sport Modes will feel similar on asmooth road. Select a new settingwhenever driving conditions change.

Tour Mode

Use for normal city and highwaydriving to provide a smooth, soft ride.

When selected, there will be noindication in the DIC.

Sport Mode

Use where road conditions or personalpreference demand a more controlledresponse.

The steering will change to providemore precise control. The MagneticRide Control will change to providebetter cornering performance.

When selected, the Sport Modeindicator will display in the DIC.

Snow/Ice Mode

Use when more traction is neededduring slippery conditions.

The vehicle will upshift normallywhen the vehicle is moving. Theacceleration will adjust to help providea smoother launch.

When selected, the Snow/Ice Modeindicator will display in the DIC.

Tow/Haul Mode

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or a largeor heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode0 206.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle and trailercombined weight is at least 75 percentof the vehicle’s Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR). See “Weightof the Trailer” under Trailer Towing0 250.



Tow/Haul is most useful under thefollowing conditions:

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load through rollingterrain

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in stop-and-gotraffic

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage. However,there is no benefit to the selection ofTow/Haul when the vehicle isunloaded. Such a selection whenunloaded may result in unpleasantengine and transmission drivingcharacteristics and reduced fueleconomy. Tow/Haul is recommendedonly when pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load.

When selected, the Tow/Haulindicator will display in theinstrument cluster.

Magnetic Ride ControlThe Magnetic Ride Control monitorsthe suspension system.

Based on road conditions, steeringwheel angle, and vehicle speed, thesystem automatically adjusts toprovide the best handling whileproviding a smooth ride. The Tour andSport Modes will feel similar on asmooth road.

Tour : Use for normal city andhighway driving. This setting providesa smooth, soft ride.

8 Sport : Use where road conditionsor personal preference demand morecontrol. This setting provides more“feel,” or response to road conditions.

6 Snow/Ice : Use when moretraction is needed during slipperyconditions.

The vehicle is normally in Tour Mode.Sport Mode and Snow/Ice Mode areengaged when the Magnetic RideControl MODE button on the centerstack is pressed. Press the button toselect the desired mode.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)briefly displays the appropriatemessage on vehicle startup or when anew mode is selected.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud, ice,sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, but



when traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rearsuspension comes as a part of theMagnetic Ride Control system.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide a betterleveled riding position as well asbetter handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions. Anair compressor connected to the rearshocks will raise or lower the rear ofthe vehicle to maintain proper vehicleheight. The system is activated whenthe ignition is on and willautomatically adjust vehicle heightthereafter. The system may exhaust(lower vehicle height) for up to10 minutes after the ignition has beenturned off. You may hear the aircompressor operating when the heightis being adjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch is beingused, it is recommended to allow theshocks to inflate, leveling the vehicleprior to adjusting the hitch.

Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely at asteady speed. Do not use cruisecontrol on winding roads or inheavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you couldlose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

If equipped with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator.Cruise control does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control system begins tolimit wheel spin while using cruisecontrol, the cruise controlautomatically disengages. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control

0 214. If a collision alert occurs whencruise control is activated, cruisecontrol is disengaged. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 235.When road conditions allow you tosafely use it again, the cruise controlcan be turned back on.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

J : Press to turn the system on andoff. A white indicator appears in theinstrument cluster when cruise isturned on.



+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press the control up brieflyto resume that speed or press andhold to accelerate. If the cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press the control down brieflyto set the speed and activate cruisecontrol. If the cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruise controlwithout erasing the set speed frommemory.

Setting Cruise Control

If J is on when not in use, SET− or+RES could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep J offwhen cruise is not being used.

To set cruise control:

1. Press J.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

When the cruise control has been setto the desired speed, a green cruisecontrol indicator appears on theinstrument cluster and a cruise setspeed message appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) andHead-Up Display (HUD), if equipped.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at a desiredspeed and then the brakes are appliedor* is pressed, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press +RESup briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed.

Increasing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:

. Press and hold +RES up until thevehicle accelerates to the desiredspeed, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed in smallincrements, press +RES up briefly.For each press, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 129.The increment value used depends onthe units displayed.

Reducing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:

. Press and hold SET− down untilthe desired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, press SET−down briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.




Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increasethe vehicle speed. When you take yourfoot off the pedal, the vehicle will slowdown to the previous set cruise speed.

While pressing the accelerator pedalor shortly following the release tooverride cruise, briefly applying theSET− control will result in cruise setto the current vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control works onhills depends on the vehicle speed, theload, and the steepness of the hills.When going up steep hills, pressingthe accelerator pedal may benecessary to maintain vehicle speed.When going downhill, Cruise GradeBraking helps maintain the driverselected speed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabled whenthe vehicle is started and cruisecontrol is active. It is not enabled inRange Selection Mode. It assists inmaintaining driver selected speed

when driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmission toslow the vehicle.

To disable and enable Cruise GradeBraking for the current ignition cycle,press and hold the Tow/Haul buttonfor five seconds. A Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message displays.

For other forms of Grade Braking, seeAutomatic Transmission 0 202 andTow/Haul Mode 0 206.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,press J.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed is erasedfrom memory if J is pressed or ifthe ignition is turned off.

Adaptive Cruise ControlIf equipped with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it allows for selectingthe cruise control set speed andfollowing gap. Read this entire sectionbefore using this system. ACC uses acamera and radar sensors to detectother vehicles. See Radio FrequencyStatement 0 365. The following gap isthe following time (or distance)between your vehicle and a vehicledetected directly ahead in your path,moving in the same direction. If novehicle is detected in your path, ACCworks like regular cruise control.

If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can speed up the vehicle or applylimited, moderate braking to maintainthe selected following gap. Todisengage ACC, apply the brake. If theTraction Control System (TCS) orelectronic stability control systemactivates while ACC is engaged, ACCmay automatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 214. When road conditionsallow ACC to be safely used, the ACCcan be turned back on.



ACC will not engage if the TCS orStabiliTrak electronic stability controlsystem is disabled.

{ Warning

ACC has limited braking ability andmay not have time to slow thevehicle down enough to avoid acollision with another vehicle youare following. This can occur whenvehicles suddenly slow or stopahead, or enter your lane. Also see“Alerting the Driver” in this section.Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes. See DefensiveDriving 0 180.

{ Warning

ACC will not detect or brake forchildren, pedestrians, animals,or other objects.

Do not use ACC when:

. On winding and hilly roads orwhen the sensors are blockedby snow, ice, or dirt. Thesystem may not detect avehicle ahead. Keep the entirefront of the vehicle clean.

. Visibility is low, such as infog, rain, or snow conditions.ACC performance is limitedunder these conditions.

. On slippery roads where fastchanges in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip.

J : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator turns white on theinstrument cluster when ACC isturned on.

+RES : Press the control up briefly toresume the previous set speed or holdupwards to accelerate. If ACC isalready engaged, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET– : Press the control down brieflyto set the speed and activate ACC.If ACC is already engaged, use todecrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage ACC withouterasing the selected set speed.



[ : Press to select a following gaptime (or distance) setting for ACC ofFar, Medium, or Near.


Switching Between ACC andRegular Cruise Control

If equipped, to switch between ACCand regular cruise control, press andhold*. A Driver Information Display(DIC) message displays. See VehicleMessages 0 149.

ACC Indicator Regular CruiseControl Indicator

When ACC is engaged, a greenoindicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster and the following gap will bedisplayed. When the regular cruise

control is engaged, a green Jindicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster; the following gap will notdisplay.

When the vehicle is turned on, thecruise control mode will be set to thelast mode used before the vehicle wasturned off.

{ Warning

Always check the cruise controlindicator on the instrument clusterto determine which mode cruisecontrol is in before using thefeature. If ACC is not active, thevehicle will not automatically brakefor other vehicles, which couldcause an accident if the brakes arenot applied manually. You andothers could be seriously injured orkilled.

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

If J is on when not in use, it couldget pressed and go into ACC when notdesired. Keep J off when cruise isnot being used.

Select the set speed desired for ACC.This is the vehicle speed when novehicle is detected in its path.

While the vehicle is moving, ACC willnot set at a speed less than 25 km/h(15 mph), although it can be resumedwhen driving at lower speeds.

To set ACC while moving:

1. Press J.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET–.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle ahead isdetected closer than the selectedfollowing gap.

ACC can also be set while the vehicleis stopped if ACC is on and the brakepedal is applied.



The ACC indicator displays on theinstrument cluster and Head-UpDisplay (HUD). When ACC is active,the indicator will be lit green.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selecting theset speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If ACC is set at a desired speed andthen the brakes are applied, ACC isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

To begin using ACC again, press RES+up briefly.

. If the vehicle is moving, it returnsto the previous set speed.

. If the vehicle is stopped with thebrake pedal applied, press RES+and release the brake pedal. ACCwill hold the vehicle until RES+ orthe accelerator pedal is pressed.

A green ACC indicator and the setspeed display on the instrumentcluster. The vehicle ahead indicatormay be flashing if a vehicle ahead was

present and moved. See “Approachingand Following a Vehicle” later in thissection.

Once ACC has resumed, if there is novehicle ahead, if the vehicle ahead isbeyond the selected following gap,or if the vehicle has exited a sharpcurve, then the vehicle speed willincrease to the set speed.

Increasing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the accelerator to get to thehigher speed. Press SET– down.Release the control and theaccelerator pedal. The vehicle willnow cruise at the higher speed.

When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brakebecause it is overridden. The ACCindicator will turn blue on theinstrument cluster.

. Press and hold +RES up until thedesired set speed appears on thedisplay, then release it.

. To increase speed in smallincrements, briefly press +RES up.For each press, the vehicle speedincreases by 1 km/h (1 mph).

. To increase speed in largerincrements, press and briefly hold+RES up. For each press, thevehicle speed increases by5 km/h (5 mph).

When it is determined there is novehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead isbeyond the selected following gap, thevehicle speed will increase to the setspeed.

The set speed can also be increasedwhile the vehicle is stopped.

. If stopped with the brake applied,press RES+ until the desired setspeed is displayed.

. If ACC is holding the vehicle at astop and there is another vehicledirectly ahead, pressing RES+ willincrease the set speed. PressingRES+ when there is no longer avehicle ahead will cause ACC toresume.



Reducing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the brake to get to the desiredlower speed. Release the brake andpress SET– . The vehicle will nowcruise at the lower speed.

. Press and hold SET– down untilthe desired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease speed in smallerincrements, briefly press SET−down. For each press, the vehiclespeed increases by 1 km/h (1 mph).

. To decrease speed in largerincrements, press and briefly holdSET− down. For each press, thevehicle speed decreases by5 km/h (5 mph).

. To decrease speed while thevehicle is stopped, press SET−until the desired set speed isdisplayed.

Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead within the selectedfollowing gap, ACC will adjust the

vehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press[ on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Each presscycles the gap button through threesettings: Far, Medium, or Near.

When pressed, the current gap settingdisplays briefly on the DIC and HUD.The gap setting will be maintaineduntil it is changed.

Since each gap setting corresponds toa following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance willvary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the furtherback your vehicle will follow a vehicledetected ahead. Consider traffic andweather conditions when selecting thefollowing gap. The range of selectablegaps may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alert timingsensitivity (Far, Medium, or Near) forthe Forward Collision Alert (FCA)feature. See Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System 0 235.

Alerting the Driver

If ACC is engaged, driver action maybe required when ACC cannot applysufficient braking when approaching avehicle too rapidly.

When this condition occurs, thecollision alert symbol on the HUD willflash on the windshield. Either eightbeeps will sound from the front,or both sides of the Safety Alert Seatwill pulse five times. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

See Defensive Driving 0 180.



Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead indicator is in theinstrument cluster and HUD display.

This indicator only displays when avehicle is detected in your vehicle’spath moving in the same direction.

If this indicator is not displaying, ACCwill not respond to or brake tovehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle in front at theselected following gap. The vehiclespeed increases or decreases to followthe vehicle in front of you, but willnot exceed the set speed. It may applylimited braking, if necessary. Whenbraking is active, the brake lights willcome on. The automatic braking may

feel or sound different than if thebrakes were applied manually. This isnormal.

Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ Warning

ACC may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem may not brake for a vehicleit has never detected moving. Thiscan occur in stop-and-go traffic orwhen a vehicle suddenly appearsdue to a vehicle ahead changinglanes. Your vehicle may not stopand could cause a crash. Usecaution when using ACC. Yourcomplete attention is alwaysrequired while driving and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes.

ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengage andthe driver will need to manually applythe brakes to slow the vehicle if:

. The sensors are blocked.

. The Traction Control System (TCS)or electronic stability controlsystem has activated or beendisabled.

. There is a fault in the system.

. The radar falsely reports blockagewhen driving in a desert or remotearea with no other vehicles orroadside objects. A DIC messagemay display to indicate that ACCis temporarily unavailable.

The ACC active indicator will turnwhite when ACC is no longer active.

In some cases, when ACC will notactivate, regular Cruise Control maybe used. See “Switching Between ACCand Regular Cruise Control” previouslyin this section. Always considerdriving conditions before using eithercruise control system.

Notification to Resume ACC

ACC will maintain a following gapbehind a detected vehicle and slowyour vehicle to a stop behind thedetected vehicle.



If the stopped vehicle ahead hasdriven away and ACC has notresumed, the vehicle ahead indicatorwill flash as a reminder to checktraffic ahead before proceeding. Inaddition, the left and right sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse threetimes, or three beeps will sound. See”Alert Type” and “Adaptive Cruise GoNotifier” in “Collision/DetectionSystems” under Vehicle Personalization0 150.

When the vehicle ahead drives away,press +RES or the accelerator pedal toresume cruise control. If stopped formore than two minutes or if the driverdoor is opened and the driver seat beltis unbuckled, the ACC automaticallyapplies the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle. The EPBstatus light will turn on. See ElectricParking Brake 0 212. To resume ACCand release the EPB, press theaccelerator pedal.

A DIC warning message may displayindicating to shift to P (Park) beforeexiting the vehicle. See VehicleMessages 0 149.

{ Warning

If ACC has stopped the vehicle, andif ACC is disengaged, turned off,or canceled, the vehicle will nolonger be held at a stop. The vehiclecan move. When ACC is holding thevehicle at a stop, always beprepared to manually apply thebrakes.

{ Warning

Leaving the vehicle without placingit in P (Park) can be dangerous. Donot leave the vehicle while it isbeing held at a stop by ACC. Alwaysplace the vehicle in P (Park) andturn off the ignition before leavingthe vehicle.

ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, the ACC indicator turnsblue on the instrument cluster. ACCwill resume operation when theaccelerator pedal is not being pressed.

{ Warning

The ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.

Curves in the Road

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicleaccelerates up to the set speed,especially when following a vehicleexiting or entering exit ramps. Youcould lose control of the vehicle orcrash. Do not use ACC while drivingon an entrance or exit ramp. Alwaysbe ready to use the brakes ifnecessary.



{ Warning

On curves, ACC may respond to avehicle in another lane, or may nothave time to react to a vehicle inyour lane. You could crash into avehicle ahead of you, or lose controlof your vehicle. Give extra attentionin curves and be ready to use thebrakes if necessary. Select anappropriate speed while driving incurves.

ACC may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce the vehiclespeed if the curve is too sharp.

When following a vehicle and enteringa curve, ACC may not detect thevehicle ahead and accelerate to the setspeed. When this happens, the vehicleahead indicator will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that is notin your lane and apply the brakes.

ACC may occasionally provide an alertand/or braking that is consideredunnecessary. It could respond tovehicles in different lanes, signs,guardrails, and other stationaryobjects when entering or exiting acurve. This is normal operation. Thevehicle does not need service.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.

Do Not Use ACC on Hills and WhenTowing a Trailer

Do not use ACC when driving on steephills or when towing a trailer. ACC willnot detect a vehicle in the lane while



driving on steep hills. The driver willoften need to take over accelerationand braking on steep hills, especiallywhen towing a trailer. If the brakes areapplied, the ACC disengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Press J.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed is erasedfrom memory if J is pressed or ifthe ignition is turned off.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The camera sensor on the windshieldahead of the rearview mirror and theradar sensors on the front of thevehicle can become blocked by snow,ice, dirt, or mud. These areas need tobe cleaned for ACC to operateproperly.

If ACC will not operate, regular CruiseControl may be available. See“Switching Between ACC and RegularCruise Control” previously in thissection. Always consider drivingconditions before using either cruisecontrol system.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” under ExteriorCare 0 330.

System operation may also be limitedunder snow, heavy rain, or road sprayconditions.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashes orreduce crash damage while driving,backing, and parking. Read this entiresection before using these systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. These systemsdo not replace the need for payingattention and driving safely. Youmay not hear or feel alerts orwarnings provided by thesesystems. Failure to use proper carewhen driving may result in injury,death, or vehicle damage. SeeDefensive Driving 0 180.

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitored bythe system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide you withenough time to avoid a crash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

. Work if the detection sensoris covered up, such as with asticker, magnet, or metalplate.

. Work if the area surroundingthe detection sensor isdamaged or not properlyrepaired.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes and/or steer thevehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance features alertthe driver of obstacles by beeping. Tochange the volume of the warningchime, see “Comfort and Convenience”under Vehicle Personalization 0 150.

If equipped with the Safety Alert Seat,the driver seat cushion may provide avibrating pulse alert instead ofbeeping. To change this, see“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 150.

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Rear Parking Assist (RPA),Front Parking Assist (FPA), SurroundVision, Front Vision Camera, ReverseAutomatic Braking (RAB) and BackingWarning System, Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA), and Automatic ParkingAssist (APA) may help the driver parkor avoid objects. Always check aroundthe vehicle when parking or backing.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the infotainment display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press anybutton on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or reach a vehiclespeed of approximately 12 km/h(8 mph). The rear vision camera isabove the license plate.

1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera



1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display toshow that Rear Parking Assist (RPA)has detected an object. This trianglechanges from amber to red andincreases in size the closer the object.

Surround Vision

If equipped, Surround Vision displaysan image of the area surrounding thevehicle, along with the front or rearcamera views in the infotainment

display. The front camera is in thegrille or near the front emblem, theside cameras are on the bottom of theoutside rearview mirrors, and the rearcamera is above the license plate.

{ Warning

The Surround Vision cameras haveblind spots and will not display allobjects near the corners of thevehicle. Folding side mirrors thatare out of position will not displaysurround view correctly. Alwayscheck around the vehicle whenparking or backing.

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

Front Vision Camera

If equipped, a view of the area in frontof the vehicle shows in theinfotainment display. The view



displays after shifting from R (Reverse)to a forward gear, or by touchingCAMERA on the infotainment display,and when the vehicle is movingforward slower than 8 km/h (5 mph).If equipped, the front view cameraalso displays when the Parking Assistsystem detects an object within30 cm (12 in).

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of the cameras’field of view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Showndistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not drive orpark the vehicle using only thesecamera(s). Always check behind andaround the vehicle before driving.Failure to use proper care mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage.

Parking Assist

With Front and Rear Parking Assist,as the vehicle moves at speeds of lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph) the sensors onthe bumpers may detect objects up to1.2 m (4 ft) in front and 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle within a zone25 cm (10 in) high off the ground andbelow bumper level. These detectiondistances may be shorter duringwarmer or humid weather. Blockedsensors will not detect objects andcan also cause false detections. Keepthe sensors clean of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush; and clean sensors aftera car wash in freezing temperatures.

{ Warning

The Parking Assist system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with Parking Assist,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrors beforemoving forward or backing.

The instrument cluster may have aparking assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object” and objectlocation information for the Front andRear Parking Assist system. As theobject gets closer, more bars light upand the bars change color from yellowto amber to red.

When an object is first detected in therear, one beep will be heard from therear, or both sides of the Safety AlertSeat will pulse two times. When anobject is very close (<0.6 m (2 ft) in the



vehicle rear, or <0.3 m (1 ft) in thevehicle front), a continuous beep willsound from the front or reardepending on object location, or bothsides of the Safety Alert Seat willpulse five times. Beeps for FPA arehigher pitched than for RPA.

Backing Warning and ReverseAutomatic Braking

Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) have the Backing Warning andReverse Automatic Braking (RAB). TheBacking Warning part of this systemcan warn of rear objects when backingup at speeds greater than8 km/h (5 mph).

The Backing Warning System willbeep once from the rear when anobject is first detected, or pulse twiceon both sides of the Safety Alert Seat.When the system detects a potentialcrash, beeps will be heard from therear, or five pulses will be felt on bothsides of the Safety Alert Seat. Theremay also be a brief, sharp applicationof the brakes.

{ Warning

The Backing Warning System onlyoperates at speeds greater than8 km/h (5 mph). It does not detectchildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or objects below thebumper or that are too close or toofar from the vehicle. In somesituations, such as at higherbacking speeds, there may not beenough time for the short, sharpapplication of the vehicle brakesystem to occur. To prevent injury,death, or vehicle damage, even withthe Backing Warning System,always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrors beforebacking.

When the vehicle is in R (Reverse),if the system detects the vehicle isbacking too fast to avoid a crash witha detected object behind your vehiclein your path, it may automaticallybrake hard to a stop to help avoid orreduce the harm caused by a backingcrash.

{ Warning

RAB may not avoid many types ofbacking crashes. Do not wait for theautomatic braking to apply. Thissystem is not designed to replacedriver braking and only works inR (Reverse) when an object isdetected directly behind the vehicle.It may not brake or stop in time toavoid a crash. It will not brake forobjects when the vehicle is movingat very low speeds. It does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objects belowthe bumper or that are too close ortoo far from the vehicle. To preventinjury, death, or vehicle damage,even with RAB, always check thearea around the vehicle before andwhile backing.

Pressing the brake pedal after thevehicle comes to a stop will releaseRAB. If the brake pedal is not pressedsoon after the stop, the ElectricParking Brake may be set. When it issafe, press the accelerator pedal firmlyat any time to override RAB.



{ Warning

There may be instances whereunexpected or undesired automaticbraking occurs. If this happens,either press the brake pedal orfirmly press the accelerator pedal torelease the brakes from the RABsystem. Before releasing the brakes,check the RVC and check the areaaround the vehicle to make sure itis safe to proceed.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If equipped, when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), RCTA shows ared warning triangle with a left orright pointing arrow on theinfotainment display to warn of trafficcoming from the left or right. Thissystem detects objects coming fromup to 20 m (65 ft) from the left orright side of the vehicle. When anobject is detected, either three beepssound from the left or right or threeSafety Alert Seat pulses occur on theleft or right side, depending on thedirection of the detected vehicle.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend out fromthe back of the vehicle do not movefurther back when a trailer is towed.

Turning the Features On or Off

PressX on the center stack to turnon or off the Front and Rear ParkingAssist, Rear Cross Traffic Alert,Reverse Automatic Braking, andBacking Warning System at the sametime. The indicator light next to thebutton comes on when the featuresare on and turns off when the featureshave been disabled.

Front and Rear Parking Assist can beturned off, on, or on with towbarthrough vehicle personalization. See“Park Assist” under VehiclePersonalization 0 150. If the parkingassist is turned off through vehiclepersonalization, the park assist button

will be disabled. To turn the parkingassist on again, select On in thevehicle personalization menu. The Onwith Towbar setting allows for theparking assist to work properly withthe trailer hitch.

Turn off parking assist and ReverseAutomatic Braking when towing atrailer.

To turn the RPA symbols, guidancelines (on some models), or Rear CrossTraffic Alert on or off, see “RearCamera” under Vehicle Personalization0 150. On some models, select theguidance lines button on theinfotainment display to turn them onor off.

On some vehicles the RCTA settingcan be turned off through “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

Automatic Parking Assist (APA)

If equipped, APA searches for andsteers the vehicle into parallel andperpendicular parking spots. Whenusing APA, you must still shift gears,and control the brakes and



accelerator. A display and audiblebeeps help to guide parkingmaneuvers.

{ Warning

APA does not apply the brakes. APAmay not detect objects in theparking space, objects that are softor narrow, objects high off theground such as flatbed trucks,or objects below ground level suchas large potholes. Always verify thatthe parking space is appropriate forparking a vehicle. APA does notrespond to changes in the parkingspace, such as movement of anadjacent vehicle, or a person orobject entering the parking space.APA does not detect or avoid trafficthat is behind or alongside of thevehicle. Always be prepared to stopthe vehicle during the parkingmaneuver.

PressO on the center stack toenable the system to search for aparking space that is large enough andwithin 1.5 m (5 ft) of the vehicle. The

vehicle speed must be below30 km/h (18 mph). APA does not workin 4m or 4n.The system cannot:

. Detect whether it is a legal parkingspace.

. Park exactly lined up with thevehicle next to it if the spot isapproached at an angle or if theparking space is angled.

. Park exactly centered in a spotthat is marked too large.

. Always detect short curbs.

When enabled, APA searches forparallel parking spaces to the right ofthe vehicle. To search for a parkingspace to the left, turn on the left turnsignal or, if available, change the sideselection in the infotainment display.To switch the parking mode betweenparallel and perpendicular, press andholdO during the search process or,if available, change the parking modein the infotainment display.

After completely passing a largeenough space, an audible beep occursand a red stop symbol is displayed.

If the vehicle is in R (Reverse), butdoes not steer into the expectedspace, this may be because the systemis maneuvering the vehicle into apreviously detected space. The APAsystem does not need service.



APA will instruct the vehicle to stoponce a large enough space is found.Follow the displayed instructions.When instructed to drive in reverse,shift to R (Reverse) to engageautomatic steering. The steering wheelwill briefly vibrate as a reminder toremove hands from the steeringwheel. Check surroundings andcontinue braking or accelerating asneeded, and be prepared to stop toavoid vehicles, pedestrians, or objects.

If the vehicle exceeds 10 km/h(6 mph), APA is automaticallydisengaged and automatic steeringwill turn off. A progress arrow displaysthe status of the parking maneuver.Depending on the space size,additional maneuvers may berequired, and there will be additionalinstructions. When changing gears,allow the automatic steering tocomplete before continuing theparking maneuver. Upon successfulcompletion of a maneuver, APA willbeep and display a PARKINGCOMPLETE message. Place the vehiclein P (Park).

APA may automatically disengage if:

. The steering wheel is used by thedriver.

. The maximum allowed speed isexceeded.

. There is a failure with the APAsystem.

. Electronic stability control orantilock brakes are activated.

. A high priority vehicle message isdisplayed in the DIC.

To cancel APA, pressO again.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork Properly

The APA system may require a shortperiod of driving along curves tocalibrate.

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving the vehiclein a forward gear, Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning(LDW), Lane Keep Assist (LKA), SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA), Lane Change

Alert (LCA), and/or ForwardAutomatic Braking (FAB) can help toavoid a crash or reduce crash damage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system may helpto avoid or reduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. When approachinga vehicle ahead too quickly, FCAprovides a red flashing alert on thewindshield and rapidly beeps or pulsesthe driver seat. FCA also lights anamber visual alert if following anothervehicle much too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within a distanceof approximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 8 km/h(5 mph). If the vehicle has AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), it can detectvehicles to distances of approximately110 m (360 ft) and operates at allspeeds. See Adaptive Cruise Control0 220.



{ Warning

FCA is a warning system and doesnot apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. It also may notprovide any warning at all. FCAdoes not warn of pedestrians,animals, signs, guardrails, bridges,construction barrels, or otherobjects. Be ready to take action andapply the brakes. See DefensiveDriving 0 180.

FCA can be disabled with either theFCA steering wheel control or,if equipped, through vehiclepersonalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected, thevehicle ahead indicator will displaygreen. Vehicles may not be detectedon curves, highway exit ramps,or hills, due to poor visibility; or if avehicle ahead is partially blocked bypedestrians or other objects. FCA willnot detect another vehicle ahead untilit is completely in the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warning tohelp avoid a crash, unless it detectsa vehicle. FCA may not detect avehicle ahead if the FCA sensor isblocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or ifthe windshield is damaged. It may

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

also not detect a vehicle on windingor hilly roads, or in conditions thatcan limit visibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times. Whenthis Collision Alert occurs, the brakesystem may prepare for driver brakingto occur more rapidly which can cause



a brief, mild deceleration. Continue toapply the brake pedal as needed.Cruise control may be disengagedwhen the Collision Alert occurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you are followinga vehicle ahead much too closely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ to set theFCA timing to Far, Medium, Near,or on some vehicles, Off. The firstbutton press shows the current settingon the Driver Information Center(DIC). Additional button presses willchange this setting. The chosensetting will remain until it is changedand will affect the timing of both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehicle speed.The faster the vehicle speed, thefarther away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alerttiming. The range of selectable alerttiming may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC),changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the ACCfollowing gap setting (Far, Medium,or Near).

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessary alertsfor turning vehicles, vehicles in otherlanes, objects that are not vehicles,or shadows. These alerts are normaloperation and the vehicle does notneed service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, this may correct theissue:

. Clean the outside of thewindshield in front of the rearviewmirror.

. Clean the entire front of thevehicle.

. Clean the headlamps.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” under ExteriorCare 0 330.

System operation may also be limitedunder snow, heavy rain, or road sprayconditions.



Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA).When the system detects a vehicleahead in your path that is traveling inthe same direction that you may beabout to crash into, it can provide aboost to braking or automaticallybrake the vehicle. This can help avoidor lessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear. Dependingon the situation, the vehicle mayautomatically brake moderately orhard. This forward automatic brakingcan only occur if a vehicle is detected.This is shown by the FCA vehicleahead indicator being lit. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 235.

The system works when driving in aforward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph)and 80 km/h (50 mph), or on vehicleswith Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),above 4 km/h (2 mph). It can detectvehicles up to approximately 60 m(197 ft).

{ Warning

FAB is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Do notrely on FAB to brake the vehicle.FAB will not brake outside of itsoperating speed range and onlyresponds to detected vehicles.

FAB may not:

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

. Detect all vehicles, especiallyvehicles with a trailer,tractors, muddy vehicles, etc.

. Detect a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, suchas in fog, rain, or snow.

. Detect a vehicle ahead if it ispartially blocked bypedestrians or other objects.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes and/or steer thevehicle to avoid crashes.

FAB may slow the vehicle to acomplete stop to try to avoid apotential crash. If this happens, FABmay engage the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop.Release the EPB or firmly press theaccelerator pedal.

{ Warning

FAB may automatically brake thevehicle suddenly in situationswhere it is unexpected andundesired. It could respond to aturning vehicle ahead, guardrails,signs, and other non-movingobjects. To override FAB, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providing aboost to braking based on the speedof approach and distance to a vehicleahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedalmovement during this time is normaland the brake pedal should continue



to be applied as needed. IBA willautomatically disengage only whenthe brake pedal is released.

{ Warning

IBA may increase vehicle braking insituations when it may not benecessary. You could block the flowof traffic. If this occurs, take yourfoot off the brake pedal and thenapply the brakes as needed.

FAB and IBA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 150.

{ Warning

Using FAB or IBA while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.Turn the system to Alert, or if thevehicle has ACC to Off, whentowing a trailer.

A system unavailable message maydisplay if:

. The front of the vehicle orwindshield is not clean.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith object detection.

. There is a problem with theStabiliTrak system.

The FAB system does not needservice.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding crashes that occur withmoving vehicles in the side blind zone(or spot) areas. When the vehicle is ina forward gear, the left or right sidemirror display will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in that blind zone.If the turn signal is activated and avehicle is also detected on the sameside, the display will flash as an extrawarning not to change lanes. Sincethis system is part of the Lane ChangeAlert (LCA) system, read the entireLCA section before using this feature.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding lane change crashesthat occur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas or withvehicles rapidly approaching theseareas from behind. The LCA warningdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirror andwill flash if the turn signal is on.

{ Warning

LCA does not alert the driver tovehicles outside of the systemdetection zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. It may notprovide alerts when changing lanesunder all driving conditions. Failureto use proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Before making alane change, always check mirrors,glance over your shoulder, and usethe turn signals.



LCA Detection Zones

1. SBZA Detection Zone2. LCA Detection Zone

The LCA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. The SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) warning areastarts at approximately the middle ofthe vehicle and goes back 5 m (16 ft).Drivers are also warned of vehiclesrapidly approaching from up to 70 m(230 ft) behind the vehicle.

How the System Works

The LCA symbol lights up in the sidemirrors when the system detects amoving vehicle in the next lane over

that is in the side blind zone orrapidly approaching that zone frombehind. A lit LCA symbol indicates itmay be unsafe to change lanes. Beforemaking a lane change, check the LCAdisplay, check mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror LCA displays willbriefly come on to indicate the systemis operating. When the vehicle is in aforward gear, the left or right sidemirror display will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in the next laneover in that blind zone or rapidlyapproaching that zone. If the turnsignal is activated in the samedirection as a detected vehicle, thisdisplay will flash as an extra warningnot to change lanes.

LCA can be disabled. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 150. If LCA isdisabled by the driver, the LCA mirrordisplays will not light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The LCA system requires some drivingfor the system to calibrate tomaximum performance. Thiscalibration may occur more quickly ifthe vehicle is driving on a straighthighway road with traffic and roadsideobjects (e.g., guardrails, barriers).

LCA displays may not come on whenpassing a vehicle quickly, for astopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. LCA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extending outto either side of the vehicle. Attachedobjects may also interfere with the



detection of vehicles. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service.

LCA may not always alert the driver tovehicles in the next lane over,especially in wet conditions or whendriving on sharp curves. The systemdoes not need to be serviced. Thesystem may light up due to guardrails,signs, trees, shrubs, and othernon-moving objects. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service.

LCA may not operate when the LCAsensors in the left or right corners ofthe rear bumper are covered withmud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see "Washing theVehicle" under Exterior Care 0 330.If the DIC still displays the systemunavailable message after cleaningboth sides of the vehicle toward therear corners of the vehicle, see yourdealer.

If the LCA displays do not light upwhen moving vehicles are in the sideblind zone or are rapidly approaching

this zone and the system is clean, thesystem may need service. Take thevehicle to your dealer.

Radio Frequency Information

See Radio Frequency Statement 0 365.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide a warningif the vehicle is crossing a detectedlane marking without using a turnsignal in the lane departure direction.Since this system is part of the LaneKeep Assist (LKA) system, read theentire LKA section before using thisfeature.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signal inthat direction. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW)

system alert as the lane marking iscrossed. The LKA system will notassist or provide an LDW alert if itdetects that you are actively steering.Override LKA by turning the steeringwheel. LKA uses a camera to detectlane markings between 60 km/h (37mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph).

{ Warning

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.It may not keep the vehicle in thelane or give a Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) alert, even if a lanemarking is detected.

The LKA and LDW systemsmay not:

. Provide an alert or enoughsteering assist to avoid a lanedeparture or crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield or headlampsare blocked by dirt, snow,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

or ice, if they are not inproper condition, or if the sunshines directly into thecamera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LKA only detects lane markingson one side of the road, it will onlyassist or provide an LDW alertwhen approaching the lane on theside where it has detected a lanemarking. Even with LKA and LDW,you must steer the vehicle. Alwayskeep your attention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicle damage,injury, or death could occur. Alwayskeep the windshield, headlamps,and camera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LKA in badweather conditions.

{ Warning

Using LKA while towing a trailer oron slippery roads could cause lossof control of the vehicle and acrash. Turn the system off.

How the System Works

The LKA camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LKA on and off, pressAon the center stack.

LKA Indicator Light

When on, the LKA indicator is green ifLKA is available to assist and provideLDW alerts. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel and displayamber if the vehicle approaches adetected lane marking without using aturn signal in that direction. It may

also provide an LDW alert by flashingamber as the lane marking is crossed.Additionally, there may be threebeeps, or the driver seat may pulsethree times, on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection.

Take Steering

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle. If LKAdoes not detect active driver steering,an alert, chime, or DIC message maybe provided. Steer the vehicle todismiss.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system performance may beaffected by:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, such aswhen driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

. Roads with poor lane markings,such as two-lane roads.



If the LKA system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning the windshieldmay help.

A camera blocked message maydisplay if the camera is blocked.Cleaning the outside of the windshieldbehind the rearview mirror maycorrect the issue. Some driverassistance systems may have reducedperformance or not work at all. AnLKA or LDW unavailable message maydisplay if the systems are temporarilyunavailable. This message could bedue to a blocked camera. The LKAsystem does not need service. Cleanthe outside of the windshield behindthe rearview mirror.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alertsmay occur due to tar marks, shadows,cracks in the road, temporary orconstruction lane markings, or otherroad imperfections. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service. Turn LKA off if theseconditions continue.

FuelGM recommends the use of TOPTIER® detergent gasoline to keep theengine cleaner and reduce enginedeposits. See www.toptiergas.com for alist of TOP TIER detergent gasolinemarketers and applicable countries.

Do not use any fuel labeled E85 orFlexFuel. Do not use gasoline withethanol levels greater than 15% byvolume.

Premium unleaded gasoline meetingASTM specification D4814 with aposted octane rating of 93 is highlyrecommended for best performanceand fuel economy. Unleaded gasoline

with an octane rated as low as 87 canbe used. Using unleaded gasolinerated below 93 octane, however, willlead to reduced acceleration and fueleconomy. If knocking occurs, use agasoline rated at 93 octane as soon aspossible, otherwise, the engine couldbe damaged. If heavy knocking isheard when using gasoline with a93 octane rating, the engine needsservice.

Prohibited Fuels

Caution

Do not use fuels with any of thefollowing conditions; doing so maydamage the vehicle and void itswarranty:

. For vehicles which are notFlexFuel, fuel labeled greaterthan 15% ethanol by volume,such as mid-level ethanolblends (16 – 50% ethanol),E85, or FlexFuel.

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

. Fuel with any amount ofmethanol, methylal, andaniline. These fuels cancorrode metal fuel systemparts or damage plastic andrubber parts.

. Fuel containing metals suchas methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl(MMT), which can damagethe emissions control systemand spark plugs.

. Fuel with a posted octanerating of less than therecommended fuel. Using thisfuel will lower fuel economyand performance, and maydecrease the life of theemissions catalyst.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels that meetCalifornia specifications. See the

underhood emission control label.If this fuel is not available in statesadopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission controlsystem performance may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp couldturn on and the vehicle may not passa smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check Engine Light)0 135. If this occurs, return to yourauthorized dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used,repairs may not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesThe U.S., Canada, and Mexico postfuel octane ratings in anti-knock index(AKI). For fuel not to use in a foreigncountry, see “Prohibited Fuels” in Fuel0 243.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOP TIERdetergent gasoline is recommended.See Fuel 0 243.

If TOP TIER detergent gasoline is notavailable, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment Cleaner added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help. GM Fuel SystemTreatment Cleaner is the only gasolineadditive recommended by GeneralMotors. It is available at your dealer.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Do not use a cell phone whilerefueling.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if therefueling nozzle is insertedtoo quickly. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hotweather. Insert the refuelingnozzle slowly and wait for anyhiss noise to stop prior tobeginning to flow fuel.

Locate the fuel door. The fuel gaugehas an arrow to indicate the side ofthe vehicle the fuel door is on. Toopen the fuel door, push and releasethe rearward center edge of the door.

The vehicle has a capless refuelingsystem and does not have a fuel cap.The filling nozzle must be fullyinserted and latched prior to startingfuel flow.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait a fewseconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See Exterior Care0 330.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove the nozzle.Shut off the flow of fuel by shuttingoff the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the areaimmediately.



Filling the Tank With a PortableGas Can

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portable gas can:

1. Locate the capless funneladapter from inside the vehicle.

2. Insert and latch the funnel intothe capless fuel system.

{ Warning

Attempting to refuel without usingthe funnel adapter may cause fuelspillage and damage the caplessfuel system. This could cause a fireand you or others could be badlyburned and the vehicle could bedamaged.

3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return to the storagelocation.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite either bystatic electricity or other means.You or others could be badlyburned and the vehicle could bedamaged. Always:

. Use approved fuel containers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

keep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.



Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle. Contactyour dealer or trailering dealer forassistance with preparing the vehiclefor towing a trailer. Read the entiresection before towing a trailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 326. For towingthe vehicle behind another vehiclesuch as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 326.

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with the stateand local laws that apply to trailertowing. These requirements varyfrom state to state.

. The trailer must be equipped withbrakes adequate for the intendeduse. A loaded trailer weighingmore than 900 kg (2,000 lb) mustbe equipped with its own brakesystem, with brakes working on allaxles. Trailer braking equipmentconforming to Canadian StandardsAssociation (CSA) requirementCAN3-D313, or its equivalent, isrecommended.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

. Do not use Adaptive CruiseControl when towing.

. Turn off Parking Assist and RearCross Traffic Alert (RTCA) whentowing.

. The Forward Automatic BrakingSystem should be set to Off whentowing. See Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) 0 22.

. Turn off Lane Keep Assist (LKA)when towing. See Lane Keep Assist(LKA) 0 241.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear of thevehicle and enter if the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-most windowis open.

When towing a trailer:

. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.


(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate Control Systems”in the Index.

For more information about carbonmonoxide, see Engine Exhaust0 201.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving is longerand not as responsive as the vehicleitself. Get acquainted with thehandling and braking of the rig beforesetting out for the open road.

The structure, tires, and brakes of thetrailer must be rated to carry the load.Inadequate trailer equipment cancause the combination to operate inan unexpected or unsafe manner.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tires, andmirrors. Get familiar with thehandling and braking of the rig. If the

trailer has electric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by hand tobe sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionally tobe sure that the load is secure and thelamps and any trailer brakesstill work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavy brakingand sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is needed whentowing a trailer. The combination willnot accelerate as quickly and is longerso it is necessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. To move the trailer tothe left, move that hand to the left. Tomove the trailer to the right, move

your hand to the right. Always backup slowly and, if possible, havesomeone guide you.

Making Turns

Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally to besure the trailer bulbs are still working.



Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore starting down a long or steepdowngrade. If the transmission is notshifted down, the brakes might get hotand no longer work well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

When towing, use the Tow/Haul Modeto prevent damage to the engine ortransmission. See Tow/Haul Mode0 206.

When towing at high altitude on steepuphill grades, consider the following:Engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at normal altitudes.If the engine is turned off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude on steepuphill grades, the vehicle may showsigns similar to engine overheating. Toavoid this, let the engine run whileparked, preferably on level ground,with the transmission in P (Park) for afew minutes before turning the engineoff. If the overheat warning comes on,see Engine Overheating 0 271.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and both thevehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but do notshift into P (Park) yet. Turn thewheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.


3. Shift into a gear.


5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service more oftenwhen pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 341. Thingsthat are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transmissionfluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts,cooling system, and brake system. It isa good idea to inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitchnuts and bolts are tight.



Trailer TowingDo not tow a trailer during break-in.See New Vehicle Break-In 0 194.

Before towing a trailer, see"Hands-Free Operation" under Liftgate0 41.

{ Warning

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is too heavyor the trailer brakes are inadequatefor the load, the vehicle may notstop as expected. The driver andpassengers could be seriouslyinjured. The vehicle may also bedamaged; the resulting repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Pull a trailer only if all thesteps in this section have beenfollowed. Ask your dealer for adviceand information about towing atrailer with the vehicle.

Caution

Pulling a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, see “Weight of the Trailer”following.

Trailering is different than just drivingthe vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration,braking, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be usedproperly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Weight of the Trailer

Safe trailering requires monitoring theweight, speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, and howfrequently the vehicle is used to pull atrailer. Take into consideration anyspecial equipment on the vehicle, andthe amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of theTrailer Tongue” later in this section.

Trailer Weight Rating (TWR) iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas not only the driver but allrequired trailering equipment. Weightof additional optional equipment,passengers, and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted fromthe TWR.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the trailer can weigh, basedupon the vehicle model and options.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

Escalade 2WD Short Wheelbase 3.23 3 765 kg (8,300 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 4WD Short Wheelbase 3.23 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 2WD Long Wheelbase 3.23 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 4WD Long Wheelbase with20 inch wheels

3.23 3 583 kg (7,900 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 4WD Long Wheelbase with22 inch wheels

3.23 3 538 kg (7,800 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailerincluding any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isvery important because it is also partof the vehicle weight. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, any cargocarried in it, and the people who willbe riding in the vehicle as well astrailer tongue weight. Vehicle options,equipment, passengers, and cargo inthe vehicle reduce the amount of

tongue weight the vehicle can carry,which will also reduce the trailerweight the vehicle can tow. See VehicleLoad Limits 0 189 for moreinformation about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity.



In general, trailer tongue weight (1)should be 10-15 % of the loadedtrailer weight (2). Some specific trailertypes (especially boat trailers) falloutside of this range. In this case, therecommended tongue weight in thetrailer owner’s manual should beobserved. In all cases, the maximumloads for the vehicle series and hitchtype should not be exceeded.

Vehicle Series Hitch Type Maximum Tongue Weight

1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lb)

1500 Weight Distributing 453 kg (1,000 lb)

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailer tongueweight on the rear axle.

Trailer rating may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or theRGAWR (Rear Gross Axle WeightRating). See “Total Weight on theVehicle's Tires” following.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

If a cargo carrier is used in the trailerhitch receiver, choose a carrier thatpositions the load as close to thevehicle as possible. Make sure thetotal weight, including the carrier, isno more than half of the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle or 227 kg (500 lb), whicheveris less.



Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflatedto the inflation pressures found onthe Certification label on the centerpillar or see Vehicle Load Limits 0 189.Make sure not to exceed the GVWRlimit for the vehicle, or the RGAWR,with the tow vehicle and trailer fullyloaded for the trip including theweight of the trailer tongue. If using aweight-distributing hitch, make surenot to exceed the RGAWR beforeapplying the weight distributionspring bars.

Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailer does notexceed any of its weight ratings —GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, TWR orTongue Weight. The only way to besure it is not exceeding any of theseratings is to weigh the tow vehicle andtrailer combination, fully loaded forthe trip, getting individual weights foreach of these items.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Mostsmall-to-medium trailers can be towedwith a weight-carrying hitch whichsimply features a coupler latched tothe hitch ball. Larger trailers mayrequire a weight-distributing hitchthat uses spring bars to distribute thetrailer tongue weight among the twovehicle and trailer axles. See “Weightof the Trailer Tongue” in TrailerTowing 0 250 for rating limits withvarious hitch types.

Consider using sway controls with anytrailer. Ask a trailering professionalabout sway controls or refer to thetrailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

Weight-Distributing Hitch andAdjustment

A weight-distributing hitch may beuseful with some trailers. Use thefollowing guidelines to determine if aweight-distributing hitch shouldbe used.



Vehicle Series Trailer WeightWeight-Distributing Hitch

Usage Hitch Distribution

1500 Up to 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) Optional Refer to trailermanufacturer’srecommendation

1500 Over 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) Required 50%

1. Front of Vehicle2. Body to Ground Distance

When using a weight-distributinghitch, measure distance (2) beforecoupling the trailer to the hitch ball.Measure the height again after thetrailer is coupled and adjust the spring

bars so the distance (2) is as close aspossible to halfway between the twomeasurements.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailerto help prevent the tongue fromcontacting the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be providedby the hitch manufacturer or by thetrailer manufacturer. If the trailerbeing towed weighs up to 2 271 kg(5,000 lb) with a factory-installed stepbumper, safety chains may beattached to the attaching points onthe bumper, otherwise, safety chainsshould be attached to holes on thetrailer hitch platform. Always leave

just enough slack so the combinationcan turn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs more than900 kg (2,000 lb) must be equippedwith its own brake system, withbrakes working on all axles. Trailerbraking equipment conforming toCanadian Standards Association (CSA)requirement CAN3-D313, or itsequivalent, is recommended.

State and local regulations may alsorequire the trailer to have its ownbraking system if loaded above acertain threshold. These requirementsvary from state to state.



Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes sothey are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Do not tap into the vehicle's hydraulicsystem.

Since the vehicle is equipped withStabiliTrak, the trailer brakes cannottap into the vehicle's hydraulicsystem.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The seven-pin trailer connector ismounted in the bumper. Thisconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-duty trailerconnector available through yourdealer.

Use only a round, seven-wireconnector with flat blade terminalsmeeting SAE J2863 specifications forproper electrical connectivity.

The seven-wire harness contains thefollowing trailer circuits:

. Yellow/Grey: Left Stop/Turn Signal

. Green/Violet: Right Stop/TurnSignal

. Grey/Brown: Taillamps

. White: Ground

. White/Green: Back-up Lamps

. Red/Green: Battery Feed

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

To help charge a remote (non-vehicle)battery, press the Tow/Haul Modebutton at the end of the shift lever.If the trailer is too light for Tow/HaulMode, turn on the headlamps to helpcharge the battery.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions are includedwith the vehicle as part of the trailerwiring package. These provisions arefor an electric brake controller.

The harness should be installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have aTrailer Sway Control (TSC) feature.Trailer sway is unintended side-to-sidemotion of a trailer while being towed.

If the vehicle is towing a trailer andthe TSC detects that sway isincreasing, the vehicle brakes areselectively applied at each wheel, tohelp reduce excessive trailer sway.

If TSC is enabled, the Traction ControlSystem (TCS)/StabiliTrak warninglight will flash on the instrumentcluster. Vehicle speed must bereduced. If trailer sway continues,StabiliTrak can reduce engine torqueto help slow the vehicle. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 214.

{ Warning

Even if the vehicle is equipped withTSC, trailer sway could result inloss of control and the vehicle couldcrash. If excessive trailer sway isdetected, slow down to a safe speed.Check the trailer and vehicle to helpcorrect possible causes. These couldinclude an improperly or overloadedtrailer, unrestrained cargo, impropertrailer hitch configuration, excessivevehicle-trailer speed, or improperly

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

inflated or incorrect vehicle ortrailer tires. See Towing Equipment0 253 for trailer ratings and hitchsetup recommendations.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications 0 260.

Electronic Trailer Sway ControlDevices

Some trailers may come equippedwith an electronic device designed toreduce or control trailer sway.Aftermarket equipment manufacturersalso offer similar devices that connectto the wiring between the trailer andthe vehicle. These devices mayinterfere with the vehicle’s trailerbrake or other systems, includingintegrated anti-sway systems,if equipped. Messages related to trailerconnections or trailer brakes couldappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The effect that these

devices may have on vehicle handlingor trailer brake performance isunknown.

{ Warning

Use of electronic trailer swaycontrol devices could result inreduced trailer brake performance,loss of trailer brakes, or othermalfunctions, and could cause acrash. You or others could beinjured or killed. Before using oneof these devices:

. Ask the device or trailermanufacturer if the devicehas been thoroughly testedfor compatibility with themake, model, and year of thevehicle as well as optionalequipment installed on thevehicle.

. Before driving on the openroads, check that the trailerbrakes are working properly.Drive the vehicle with thetrailer attached on a levelroad surface that is free of

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

traffic at about 32-40 km/h(20-25 mph) and fully applythe manual trailer brake applylever. Also check that thetrailer brake lamps and otherlamps are functioningcorrectly.

. If the trailer brakes are notoperating properly at anytime, or if a DIC messageindicates problems with thetrailer connections or trailerbrakes, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side of theroad when traffic conditionsallow.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 135.A device connected to the DLC —such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehicle systems.This could affect vehicle operationand cause a crash. Such devicesmay also access information storedin the vehicle’s systems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, see Servicingthe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 94 andAdding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 94.


258 VEHICLE CARE

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 265Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . 267Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Battery - North America . . . . . . . . . 275Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . 278Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Windshield Replacement . . . . . . . . 279Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . . . . 282Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . 282Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Instrument Panel Fuse Block(Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 295Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . 301Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 309Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321


VEHICLE CARE 259

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 326

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visit yourdealer. You will receive genuine GMparts and GM-trained and supportedservice people.

Genuine GM parts have one of thesemarks:

California Proposition65 Warning

{ Warning

Most motor vehicles, including thisone, as well as many of its serviceparts and fluids, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many partsand systems, many fluids, andsome component wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals. For more information goto www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See Battery - North America 0 275 andJump Starting - North America 0 322and the back cover.


260 VEHICLE CARE

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbag initiators,seat belt pretensioners, and lithiumbatteries contained in Remote KeylessEntry transmitters, may containperchlorate materials. Specialhandling may be necessary. Foradditional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GM certifiedparts, including control module orsoftware modifications, is not coveredunder the terms of the vehiclewarranty and may affect remainingwarranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories installed by adealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 94.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not have theproper knowledge, service manual,tools, or parts. Always followowner’s manual procedures andconsult the service manual for yourvehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manualcan. To order the proper servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information 0 365.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 94.


VEHICLE CARE 261

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 351.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damage tovehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is inside the vehicleunder the steering wheel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle tofind the secondary hood release.The handle is under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Push the handle to the right andat the same time raise the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenbring the hood from full open towithin 15 cm (6 in) from the closedposition, pause, and push the frontcenter of the hood with a swift, firmmotion to fully close the hood.


262 VEHICLE CARE

Engine Compartment Overview


VEHICLE CARE 263

1. Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting - North America 0 322.

2. Battery - North America 0 275.

3. Coolant Surge Tank and PressureCap. See Cooling System 0 268.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 267.

5. Remote Negative (–) Location(Out of View). See Jump Starting -North America 0 322.

6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System 0 268.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When toAdd Engine Oil” under Engine Oil0 263.

8. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 263.

9. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid 0 272.

10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See BrakeFluid 0 274.

11. Engine Compartment Fuse Block0 283.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engine performanceand long life, careful attention mustbe paid to engine oil. Following thesesimple, but important steps will helpprotect your investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section.

. Check the engine oil level regularlyand maintain the proper oil level.See “Checking Engine Oil” and“When to Add Engine Oil” in thissection.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 265.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

Check the engine oil level regularly,every 650 km (400 mi), especially priorto a long trip. The engine oil dipstick

handle is a loop. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 262 for thelocation.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handle maybe hot; it could burn you. Use atowel or glove to touch the dipstickhandle.

If a low oil Driver Information Center(DIC) message displays, check the oillevel.

Follow these guidelines:

. To get an accurate reading, parkthe vehicle on level ground. Checkthe engine oil level after theengine has been off for at leasttwo hours. Checking the engine oillevel on steep grades or too soonafter engine shutoff can result inincorrect readings. Accuracyimproves when checking a coldengine prior to starting. Removethe dipstick and check the level.

. If unable to wait two hours, theengine must be off for at least15 minutes if the engine is warm,


264 VEHICLE CARE

or at least 30 minutes if theengine is not warm. Pull out thedipstick, wipe it with a clean papertowel or cloth, then push it backin all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and checkthe level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick and theengine has been off for at least15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” later in this section for anexplanation of what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications 0 353.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oil levelsabove or below the acceptableoperating range shown on thedipstick are harmful to the engine.If you find that you have an oillevel above the operating range, i.e.,the engine has so much oil that theoil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the enginecould be damaged. You shoulddrain out the excess oil or limitdriving of the vehicle and seek aservice professional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 262 for the location of the engine oilfill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oil dependson both the proper oil specificationand viscosity grade. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 349.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils that meetthe dexos1™ specification. Engine oilsthat have been approved by GM asmeeting the dexos1 specification aremarked with the dexos1 approvedlogo. See www.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.


VEHICLE CARE 265

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity gradeengine oil.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, it isrecommended to select an oil of thecorrect specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/Engine OilFlushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting the dexos1specification are all that is needed forgood performance and engineprotection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could cause enginedamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash or

properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in the trashor pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is based on acombination of factors which includeengine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven. Basedon driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change is indicated canvary considerably. For the oil lifesystem to work properly, the systemmust be reset every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculated thatoil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message comes on. Change theoil as soon as possible within the next1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that,if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might indicate thatan oil change is not necessary for upto a year. The engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must bereset. Your dealer has trained servicepeople who will perform this work andreset the system. It is also importantto check the oil regularly over thecourse of an oil drain interval andkeep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally,the oil must be changed at 5 000 km(3,000 mi) since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.


266 VEHICLE CARE

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem

Reset the system whenever the engineoil is changed so that the system cancalculate the next engine oil change.To reset the system:

1. Using the DIC controls on theright side of the steering wheel,display OIL LIFE on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 143. When remaining oil life islow, the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message will appear onthe display.

2. Press and hold SEL on the DICcontrols for a few seconds toclear the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message and reset the oillife at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be reset asfollows:

1. Display OIL LIFE on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 143.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageis off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is a transmissionleak or overheated transmission. Thisvehicle is not equipped with a

transmission fluid level dipstick.There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid in these vehicles.Because this procedure is difficult,this should be done at the dealer.Contact the dealer for additionalinformation or the procedure can befound in the service manual. SeeService Publications OrderingInformation 0 365.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage thevehicle, and the damage may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants0 349.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule 0 341.Be sure to use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 349.


VEHICLE CARE 267

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview0 262 for the location of the engineair cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air cleaner/filtersee Maintenance Schedule 0 341.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter,make sure that the engine air cleaner/filter housing and nearby componentsare free of dirt and debris. Remove theengine air cleaner/filter. Lightly tapand shake the engine air cleaner/filter(away from the vehicle), to releaseloose dust and dirt. Inspect the engineair cleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not clean theengine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Screws2. Electrical Connector3. Air Duct Clamp

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 262.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (3).

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (2) and the connectorharness from the cover.

4. Remove the four screws (1) ontop of the cover of the housingand lift up the cover.

5. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Take careto dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

6. Clean the engine air cleaner/filtersealing surfaces and the housing.

7. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2-4 to reinstall thefilter cover housing.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The air cleanernot only cleans the air; it helps tostop flames if the engine backfires.Use caution when working on theengine and do not drive with the aircleaner/filter off.


268 VEHICLE CARE

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place whendriving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows the engineto maintain the correct workingtemperature.

1. Coolant Surge Tank2. Coolant Surge Tank

Pressure Cap

3. Engine Cooling Fan

{ Warning

An underhood electric fan can startup even when the engine is notrunning and can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Do not touch heater or radiatorhoses, or other engine parts. Theycan be very hot and can burn you.Do not run the engine if there is aleak; all coolant could leak out.That could cause an engine fire andcan burn you. Fix any leak beforedriving the vehicle.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL engine coolant.This coolant is designed to remain inthe vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km(150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating, seeEngine Overheating 0 271.

What to Use

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids such asalcohol, can boil before the propercoolant mixture will. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot but therewould not be an overheat warning.The engine could catch fire and youor others could be burned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection down to−37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature

. Protects against rust and corrosion


VEHICLE CARE 269

. Will not damage aluminum parts

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature

Caution

Do not use anything other than amix of DEX-COOL coolant thatmeets GM Standard GMW3420 andclean, drinkable water. Anythingelse can cause damage to theengine cooling system and thevehicle, which would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, or by pouring iton the ground or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding used coolantdisposal. This will help protect theenvironment and your health.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on the passengerside of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 262.

The vehicle must be on a level surfacewhen checking the coolant level.

Check to see if coolant is visible in thecoolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, wait until it cools down. Thecoolant level should be at or above thefull cold mark. If it is not, there maybe a leak in the cooling system.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the full coldmark, see “How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank,” following.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank for GasolineEngines

{ Warning

Spilling coolant on hot engine partscan burn you. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn ifthe engine parts are hot enough.

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids such asalcohol, can boil before the propercoolant mixture will. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot but therewould not be an overheat warning.The engine could catch fire and youor others could be burned.


270 VEHICLE CARE

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressure cap,even a little, can cause them tocome out at high speed and youcould be burned. Never turn the capwhen the cooling system, includingthe pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and pressurecap to cool.

Caution

Failure to follow the specificcoolant fill procedure could causethe engine to overheat and couldcause system damage. If coolant isnot visible in the surge tank,contact your dealer.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant:

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the fullcold mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start the engineand let it run until the enginecoolant temperature gaugeindicates approximately 90 °C(195 °F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches thefull cold mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1-6.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and enginedamage may occur. Be sure the capis properly and tightly secured.


VEHICLE CARE 271

Engine Overheating

Caution

Do not run the engine if there is aleak in the engine cooling system.This can cause a loss of all coolantand can damage the system andvehicle. Have any leaks fixedright away.

The vehicle has several indicators towarn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperature gaugein the vehicle's instrument cluster. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gauge0 132.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE,and ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDmessages in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears, getservice help right away. See RoadsideService 0 360.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle is parkedon a level surface.

Check to see if the engine coolingfan(s) are running. If the engine isoverheating, the fans should berunning. If they are not, do notcontinue to run the engine, and havethe vehicle serviced.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressure cap,even a little, can cause them tocome out at high speed and youcould be burned. Never turn the capwhen the cooling system, includingthe pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and pressurecap to cool.

If No Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message,along with a low coolant condition,can indicate a serious problem.

If there is an engine overheat warning,but no steam is seen or heard, theproblem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a littletoo hot when the vehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day

. Stops after high-speed driving

. Idles for long periods in traffic

. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing0 250

If the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE messageappears with no sign of steam, try thisfor a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.


272 VEHICLE CARE

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatzone or an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling system checkedfor proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam andthe vehicle is equipped with an enginedriven cooling fan, push down theaccelerator until the engine speed isabout twice as fast as normal idlespeed for at least five minutes whilethe vehicle is parked. If the warning isstill there, turn off the engine and geteveryone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes while parked.If the warning is still displayed, turnoff the engine until it cools down.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has electric cooling fans,the fans may be heard spinning at lowspeed during most everyday driving.The fans may turn off if no cooling isrequired. Under heavy vehicle loading,trailer towing, high outsidetemperatures, or operation of the airconditioning system, the fans maychange to high speed and an increasein fan noise may be heard. This isnormal and indicates that the coolingsystem is functioning properly. Thefans will change to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

The electric engine cooling fans mayrun after the engine has been turned.off. This is normal and no service isrequired.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in an areawhere the temperature may fall belowfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for 15 seconds atthe start of each ignition cycle. Whenthe WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDmessage displays, washer fluid willneed to be added to the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.


VEHICLE CARE 273

Open the cap with the washer symbolon it. Add washer fluid until the tankis full. See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 262 for reservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or can beheard all the time when the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes will notwork well. That could lead to acrash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 353.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or ifthere is a rapid increase in pedaltravel. This could be a sign that brakeservice may be required.


274 VEHICLE CARE

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes may notwork properly. The brakingperformance expected can change inmany other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts are installedor if parts are improperly installed.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoir isfilled with GM approved DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoir cap.See Engine Compartment Overview0 262 for the location of the reservoir.

Checking Brake Fluid

With the vehicle in P (Park) on a levelsurface, the brake fluid level should bebetween the minimum and maximummarks on the brake fluid reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, the fluidlevel goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brake hydraulicsystem. Have the brake hydraulicsystem fixed. With a leak, thebrakes will not work well.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoircap and the area around the capbefore removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Addingfluid does not correct a leak. If fluid isadded when the linings are worn,there will be too much fluid whennew brake linings are installed. Add orremove fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. You or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

others could be burned, and thevehicle could be damaged. Addbrake fluid only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System Warning Light0 137.

Brake fluid absorbs water over timewhich degrades the effectiveness ofthe brake fluid. Replace brake fluid atthe specified intervals to preventincreased stopping distance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 341.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3 brakefluid from a clean, sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 349.


VEHICLE CARE 275

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be damaged. Immediatelywash off any painted surface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not remove thecap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview 0 262for battery location.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.Batteries also contain otherchemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer. WASHHANDS AFTER HANDLING. Formore information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition 65 Warning0 259 and the back cover.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode. Youcan be badly hurt if you are notcareful. See Jump Starting - North

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

America 0 322 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove the black,negative (−) cable from the battery tokeep the battery from running down.

Extended Storage: Remove the black,negative (−) cable from the battery oruse a battery trickle charger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

If the vehicle is equipped withFour-Wheel Drive, be sure to performthe lubricant checks described in thissection.

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule 0 341to determine how often to check thelubricant.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicleshould be on a level surface.


276 VEHICLE CARE

1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

If the level is below the bottom of thefill plug (1) hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant will needto be added. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of the fillplug (1) hole. Use care not toovertighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 349 to determine whatkind of lubricant to use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularly checkfront axle fluid unless a leak issuspected, or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.



1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

. When the differential is cold, addenough lubricant to raise the levelfrom 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fill plug (1) hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm), addenough lubricant to raise the levelto the bottom of the fillplug (1) hole.

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularly checkrear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluid levelon any axle, variations in the readings


VEHICLE CARE 277

can be caused by factory filldifferences between the minimum andthe maximum fluid volume. Also, if avehicle has just been driven beforechecking the fluid level, it may appearlower than normal because fluid hastraveled out along the axle tubes andhas not drained back to the sumparea. Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle has beendriven will appear to have a lowerfluid level than a vehicle that hasbeen stationary for an hour or two.The rear axle assembly must besupported on a flat, level surface toget a true reading.



The proper level is 1.0 mm to19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in) below thebottom of the fill hole, located on therear axle. Add only enough fluid toreach the proper level.

What to Use


Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this inspection,the vehicle could move suddenly.If the vehicle moves, you or otherscould be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the accelerator pedal,and be ready to turn off theengine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.


278 VEHICLE CARE

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock Control FunctionCheck

{ Warning

When you are doing this inspection,the vehicle could move suddenly.If the vehicle moves, you or otherscould be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle beginsto move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check, thevehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured andproperty could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of thevehicle in case it begins to roll. Beready to apply the regular brake atonce should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park) mechanism'sholding ability: With the enginerunning, shift to P (Park). Thenrelease the parking brake followedby the regular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts 0 350.

Front Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the wiper blade assembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.


VEHICLE CARE 279

2. Lift up on the latch in the middleof the wiper blade where thewiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not allow the wiper blade armto touch the windshield.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. With the rear wiper in the offposition, open the liftglass toaccess the rear wiper arm/blade.

The rear wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position so careshould be used when pulling itaway from the vehicle.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and push thewiper arm (1) out of the bladeassembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely in the wiper arm hookuntil the release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe glass.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealer todetermine the correct replacementglass.

Windshield Replacement

HUD System

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the windshield must bereplaced, get one that is designed forHUD or the HUD image may look outof focus.

Driver Assistance Systems

When a windshield replacement isneeded and the vehicle is equippedwith a front-looking camera sensor forthe Driver Assistance Systems, thewindshield must be installed


280 VEHICLE CARE

according to GM specifications forthese systems to work properly. If it isnot, there may be unexpectedbehavior and/or messages from thesesystems.

Gas Strut(s)This vehicle is equipped with gasstrut(s) to provide assistance in liftingand holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full open position.

{ Warning

If the gas struts that hold open thehood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail, youor others could be seriously injured.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice immediately. Visuallyinspect the gas struts for signs ofwear, cracks, or other damageperiodically. Check to make sure thehood/trunk/liftgate is held openwith enough force. If struts arefailing to hold the hood/trunk/liftgate, do not operate. Have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Do not apply tape or hang anyobjects from gas struts. Also do notpush down or pull on gas struts.This may cause damage to thevehicle.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 341.

Hood

Trunk

Liftgate


VEHICLE CARE 281

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, or any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contact yourdealer.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

License Plate Lamp

Passenger Side Shown, Driver SideSimilar


282 VEHICLE CARE

1. Bulb Socket2. Bulb3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the lamp assembly (3)toward the center of the vehicle.

2. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the release tablocks into place.

Electrical System

Electrical System OverloadThe vehicle has fuses to protectagainst an electrical system overload.Fuses also protect power devices inthe vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, there aresome spare fuses and a fuse puller inthe left instrument panel fuse block.The same amperage fuse can also beborrowed. Choose some feature of thevehicle that is not needed to use andreplace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may cause thelamps to go on and off, or in somecases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right away ifthe lamps go on and off or remain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protected fromelectrical overload, overload due toheavy snow or ice may cause wiperlinkage damage. Always clear ice andheavy snow from the windshieldbefore using the windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused by electricalproblems.


VEHICLE CARE 283

{ Danger

Fuses and circuit breakers aremarked with their ampere rating.Do not exceed thespecified amperage rating whenreplacing fuses and circuit breakers.Use of an oversized fuse or circuitbreaker can result in a vehicle fire.You and others could be seriouslyinjured or killed.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replace abad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage can betemporarily borrowed from anotherfuse location, if a fuse goes out.Replace the fuse as soon as possible.

Engine Compartment FuseBlockThe engine compartment fuse block isin the engine compartment, on thedriver side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover to access the fuse block.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep the coverson any electrical component.

A fuse puller is available in the leftinstrument panel fuse block.


284 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

1 Electric runningboards

Fuses Usage

2 Antilock brakesystem pump

Fuses Usage

3 Interior BEC LT1


VEHICLE CARE 285

Fuses Usage

4 Passenger motorizedseat belt

5 Suspension levelingcompressor

6 4WD transfer caseelectronic control

7 –

8 –

10 Electric parkingbrake/–

11 –

12 –

13 Interior BEC LT2

14 Rear BEC 1

15 –

16 –

17 Driver motorizedseat belt

18 –

19 –

20 –

Fuses Usage

21 Automatic headlampleveling/Exhaustsolenoid

22 Fuel pump

23 Integrated chassiscontrol module

24 Real timedampening

25 Fuel pump powermodule

26 –/Battery regulatedvoltage control

27 –

28 Upfitter 2

30 Wiper

31 Trailer interfacemodule

32 –

33 –

34 Reverse lamps

35 Antilock brakesystem valve

36 Trailer brakes

Fuses Usage

38 –

39 Right trailerstoplamp/Turnsignal lamp

40 Left trailerstoplamp/turnsignal lamp

41 Trailer parkinglamps

42 Right parking lamps

43 Left parking lamps

44 Upfitter 3

45 Automatic levelcontrol/Run/Crank

46 –

47 Upfitter 4

49 Reverse lamps

50 –

52 –

53 –

54 –

55 –


286 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

56 –

57 –

58 –

59 Euro trailer

60 Air conditioningcontrol

61 –

62 –

63 Upfitter 1

64 –

65 –

66 –

67 Trailer battery

68 Secondaryfuel pump

69 RC upfitter 3 and 4

70 VBATupfitter 3 and 4

71 –

73 –

Fuses Usage

74 Engine controlmodule/Ignition

75 Miscellaneous/Ignition/–

76 Transmission/Ignition

77 RC upfitter 1 and 2

78 VBATupfitter 1 and 2

79 –

80 –

81 –

82 –

83 Euro trailer/RC

85 –

86 –

87 Engine

88 Injector A – odd

89 Injector B – even

90 O2 sensor B

91 Throttle control

Fuses Usage

93 Horn

94 Fog lamps

95 High-beamheadlamps

96 –

97 –

98 –

99 –

100 O2 sensor A

101 Engine controlmodule

102 Engine controlmodule/Transmissioncontrol module

103 Auxiliary interiorheater

104 Starter

105 –

106 –

107 Aeroshutter

108 –


VEHICLE CARE 287

Fuses Usage

109 Police upfitter

110 –

111 –

113 –

114 Front windshieldwasher

115 Rear window washer

116 Left cooling fan

117 Fuel pump prime

118 –

119 –

120 Fuel pump prime

121 Right HID headlamp

122 Left HID headlamp

123 Right cooling fan

Relays Usage

9 Fuel pump

29 Upfitter 2

37 Upfitter 3

48 Upfitter 4

Relays Usage

51 Parking lamp

64 Secondaryfuel pump

72 Upfitter 1

84 Run/Crank

92 Engine controlmodule

112 Starter

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left)

The left instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the driver side edgeof the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


288 VEHICLE CARE

The vehicle may not be equipped withall of the fuses, relays, and featuresshown.

Fuses Usage

1 –

2 –

Fuses Usage

3 –

4 Accessory poweroutlet 1

5 Accessory power outletfrom retained accessorypower

6 Accessory power outletfrom battery power

7 Universal garage dooropener/Interiorrearview mirror

8 SEO/Retained accessorypower

9 –

10 Body control module 3


12 Steering wheel controlbacklighting

13 –

14 –

15 –

16 Discrete logic ignitionsensor


VEHICLE CARE 289

Fuses Usage

17 Video processingmodule

18 Mirror window module


20 Front bolster (ifequipped)

21 –

22 –

23 –

24 HVAC ignition/ AUXHVAC ignition

25 Instrument cluster/Ignition sensingdiagnostic moduleignition

26 Tilt column/SEO/Tiltcolumn lock 1/SEO

27 Data link connector/Driver seat module

28 Passive entry/Passivestart/HVAC battery

29 Content theft deterrent

30 –

Fuses Usage

31 –

32 –

33 SEO-Automatic levelcontrol/ Leftheated seat

34 Park enable/Electricadjustable pedal (ifequipped)

35 –

36 Miscellaneous run/crank

37 Heated steering wheel

38 Steering column lock 2(if equipped)

39 Instrument clusterbattery

40 –

41 –

42 Euro trailer (ifequipped)

43 Left doors

44 Driver power seat

45 –

Fuses Usage

46 Right heated, cooled,or ventilated seat (ifequipped)

47 Left heated, cooled,or ventilated seat (ifequipped)

48 –

49 –


51 –

Relays Usage

52 Retained accessorypower relay

53 Run/Crank relay

54 –

55 –

56 –


290 VEHICLE CARE

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Right)

The right instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the passenger sideedge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.

The vehicle may not be equipped withall of the fuses, relays, and featuresshown.

Fuses Usage

1 –

2 –


VEHICLE CARE 291

Fuses Usage

3 –


5 –

6 –

7 –

8 Glove box

9 –

10 –

11 –

12 Steering wheel controls


14 –

15 –

16 –

17 –

18 –


20 Rear seatentertainment

21 Sunroof

Fuses Usage

22 –

23 –

24 –

25 –

26 Infotainment/Airbag

27 –/RF window switch/Rain sensor

28 Obstacle detection/USB

29 Radio

30 –

31 –

32 –

33 –

34 –

35 –

36 Special equipmentoption B2

37 Special equipmentoption


Fuses Usage

39 Air conditioninginverter

40 –

41 –

42 –

43 –

44 Right door windowmotor

45 Front blower



48 Amplifier

49 Right front seat


51 –

53 –

54 –

55 –

56 –


292 VEHICLE CARE

Relays Usage

52 Retained accessorypower

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind the access panel on the leftside of the compartment.

Pull the panel out by grabbing thefinger access slot at the rear edge. The vehicle may not be equipped with

all of the fuses, relays, and featuresshown.

Fuses Usage

1 Rear window defoggerrelay

2 –

3 Right heated secondrow seat

4 Heated mirrors

5 Liftgate

6 Glass breakage

7 Liftglass

8 Liftgate module logic

9 Rear wiper

10 Rear heating,ventilation, and airconditioning blower

11 Second row seat

12 Liftgate module

13 Third row seat

14 Rear accessory poweroutlet

15 Rear window defogger

16 Liftgate

17 Liftglass


VEHICLE CARE 293

Fuses Usage

18 Rear fog lamp (ifequipped)

19 Rear fog lamp (ifequipped)

20 Heated mirror

Relays Usage

1 Rear window defogger

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. See thewarranty manual for informationregarding the tire warranty andwhere to get service. Foradditional information refer to thetire manufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowoutand a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 189.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash could causeserious injury. Check alltires frequently tomaintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)


294 VEHICLE CARE

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or an authorizedtire service center shouldrepair, replace, dismount,and mount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation 0 300 for inflationpressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come with all-seasontires. These tires are designed toprovide good overall performance onmost road surfaces and weatherconditions. Original equipment tiresdesigned to GM's specific tireperformance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto thesidewall. Original equipmentall-season tires can be identified bythe last two characters of this TPCcode, which will be “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires on thevehicle if frequent driving on snow orice-covered roads is expected.All-season tires provide adequateperformance for most winter drivingconditions, but they may not offer thesame level of traction or performanceas winter tires on snow or ice-coveredroads. See Winter Tires 0 294.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing winter tires

on the vehicle if frequent driving onice or snow covered roads is expected.See your dealer for details regardingwinter tire availability and proper tireselection. Also, see Buying New Tires0 307.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction, increasedroad noise, and shorter tread life.After changing to winter tires, be alertfor changes in vehicle handling andbraking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, and speedrating as the original equipmenttires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.


VEHICLE CARE 295

Low-Profile TiresThe vehicle has low profile tiresthat are classified as touring tiresand are designed for on road use.The low-profile, wide tread designis not recommended for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving 0 182,for additional information.

Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage can occurwhen coming into contact withroad hazards like potholes, or sharpedged objects, or when sliding intoa curb. The warranty does not coverthis type of damage. Keep tires setto the correct inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have all-terrain tires.These tires provide good performanceon most road surfaces, weatherconditions, and for off-road driving.See Off-Road Driving 0 182.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more quickly than other tires.Consider rotating the tires morefrequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wear isnoted when the tires are inspected.See Tire Inspection 0 305.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexample shows a typical passengervehicle tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size code isa combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification) : Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification code


296 VEHICLE CARE

molded onto the sidewall. GM'sTPC specifications meet or exceedall federal safety guidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

DOT Tire Date of Manufacture :The last four digits of the TINindicate the tire manufactureddate. The first two digits representthe week (01-52) and the last twodigits, the year. For example, thethird week of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and datethe tire was manufactured. TheTIN is molded onto both sides of

the tire, although only one sidemay have the date ofmanufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more information,see Uniform Tire Quality Grading0 309.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure 0 299 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 189.

(8) Temporary Use Only : Onlyuse a temporary spare tire untilthe road tire is repaired and

replaced. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph)when pulling a trailer, with theproper inflation pressure. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 321.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The example shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tire andRim Association.


VEHICLE CARE 297

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspectratio is 75, as shown in item C ofthe tire illustration, it would meanthat the tire's sidewall is75 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire. Theletter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of the tire.The load index represents the load

carrying capacity a tire is certifiedto carry. The speed rating is themaximum speed a tire is certifiedto carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount of airinside the tire pressing outwardon each square inch of the tire.Air pressure is expressed in kPa(kilopascal) or psi (pounds persquare inch).

Accessory Weight : The combinedweight of optional accessories.Some examples of optionalaccessories are automatictransmission, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationship ofa tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline of thetread.

Cold Tire Pressure : The amountof air pressure in a tire, measuredin kPa (kilopascal) or psi (poundsper square inch) before a tire hasbuilt up heat from driving. SeeTire Pressure 0 299.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengersand cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety


298 VEHICLE CARE

Standards. The DOT code includesthe Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designatorwhich can also identify the tiremanufacturer, production plant,brand, and date of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 189.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 189.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 189.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unitfor air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 thatcorresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : The loadrating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure forthat tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curb weight,accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production optionsweight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 189.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears whitelettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model namemolding that is higher or deeperthan the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehicle manufacturer'srecommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tireplacard.See Tire Pressure 0 299 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 189.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the ply cords that extendto the beads are laid at 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.


VEHICLE CARE 299

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beads areseated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicatingthe maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)of tread remains. See When It IsTime for New Tires 0 307.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for a tire'straction, temperature, and

treadwear. Ratings are determinedby tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 309.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated cargoload. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 189.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to a vehicleshowing the vehicle capacityweight and the original equipmenttire size and recommendedinflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” underVehicle Load Limits 0 189.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operate effectively.

Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tires thatdo not have enough air, canresult in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, can result in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.(Continued)


300 VEHICLE CARE

Caution (Continued)

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel on the vehicle indicates theoriginal equipment tires and thecorrect cold tire inflationpressures. The recommendedpressure is the minimum airpressure needed to support thevehicle's maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see Vehicle LoadLimits 0 189. How the vehicle isloaded affects vehicle handlingand ride comfort. Never load thevehicle with more weight than itwas designed to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget the spare tire, if thevehicle has one. See Full-Size SpareTire 0 321 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been driven forat least three hours or no morethan 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve to geta pressure measurement. If thecold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If the

inflation pressure is low, add airuntil the recommended pressure isreached. If the inflation pressureis high, press on the metal stem inthe center of the tire valve torelease air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher, puts additionalstrain on tires. Sustainedhigh-speed driving causes excessive

(Continued)


VEHICLE CARE 301

Warning (Continued)

heat buildup and can cause suddentire failure. This could cause acrash, and you or others could bekilled. Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicle tobe driven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, are in excellentcondition, and are set to the correctcold tire inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

When driving the vehicle at speeds of160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, set thecold inflation pressure to 20 kPa(3 psi) above the recommended tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. Return thetires to the recommended cold tireinflation pressure when high-speeddriving has ended.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 189 and TirePressure 0 299.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitor theair pressure in your tires and transmittire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to theinflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver's responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. This


302 VEHICLE CARE

sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation0 302.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). The TPMS isdesigned to warn the driver when a

low tire pressure condition exists.TPMS sensors are mounted onto eachtire and wheel assembly, excluding thespare tire and wheel assembly. TheTPMS sensors monitor the airpressure in the tires and transmit thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition isdetected, the TPMS illuminates thelow tire pressure warning light on theinstrument cluster. If the warninglight comes on, stop as soon aspossible and inflate the tires to therecommended pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 189.

A message to check the pressure in aspecific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The low tirepressure warning light and the DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the tires are

inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tire pressurelevels can be viewed. For additionalinformation and details about the DICoperation and displays see DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 143.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that the airpressure is getting low and needs tobe inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label,attached to your vehicle, shows thesize of the original equipment tiresand the correct inflation pressure forthe tires when they are cold. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 189 for anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location.Also see Tire Pressure 0 299.

The TPMS can warn about a low tirepressure condition but it does notreplace normal tire maintenance. SeeTire Inspection 0 305, Tire Rotation0 306, and Tires 0 293.


VEHICLE CARE 303

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properly ifone or more of the TPMS sensors aremissing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the lowtire pressure warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignition cycle.A DIC warning message also displays.The malfunction light and DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the problem iscorrected. Some of the conditions thatcan cause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have a TPMSsensor. The malfunction light andDIC message should go off afterthe road tire is replaced and thesensor matching process isperformed successfully. See “TPMSSensor Matching Process” later inthis section.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. The malfunctionlight and the DIC message shouldgo off after successfullycompleting the sensor matchingprocess. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. See yourdealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 307.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire pressure condition. See yourdealer for service if the TPMSmalfunction light and DIC messagecome on and stay on.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure.

When the low tire pressure warninglight comes on:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe, levelplace.


304 VEHICLE CARE

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).

4. Add air to the tire that isunderinflated. The turn signallamp will flash.

When the recommendedpressure is reached, the hornsounds once and the turn signallamp will stop flashing andbriefly turn solid.

Repeat these steps for allunderinflated tires that haveilluminated the low tire pressurewarning light.

If the tire is overinflated by more than35 kPa (5 psi), the horn will soundmultiple times and the turn signallamp will continue to flash foreight seconds after filling stops. Torelease and correct the pressure, whilethe turn signal lamp is still flashing,briefly press the center of the valvestem. When the recommendedpressure is reached, the hornsounds once.

If the turn signal lamp does not flashwithin 15 seconds after starting toinflate the tire, the tire fill alert hasnot been activated or is not working.

If the hazard warning flashers are on,the tire fill alert visual feedback willnot work properly.

The TPMS will not activate the tire fillalert properly under the followingconditions:

. There is interference from anexternal device or transmitter.

. The air pressure from the inflationdevice is not sufficient to inflatethe tire.

. There is a malfunction inthe TPMS.

. There is a malfunction in the hornor turn signal lamps.

. The identification code of theTPMS sensor is not registered tothe system.

. The battery of the TPMS sensoris low.

If the tire fill alert does not operatedue to TPMS interference, move thevehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back or

forward and try again. If the tire fillalert feature is not working, use a tirepressure gauge.

TPMS Sensor Matching Process

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one or moreof the TPMS sensors. The TPMSsensor matching process should alsobe performed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should go off atthe next ignition cycle. The sensorsare matched to the tire/wheelpositions, using a TPMS relearn tool,in the following order: driver sidefront tire, passenger side front tire,passenger side rear tire, and driverside rear tire. See your dealer forservice or to purchase a relearn tool.A TPMS relearn tool can also bepurchased. See Tire Pressure MonitorSensor Activation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).


VEHICLE CARE 305

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takes longer,the matching process stops and mustbe restarted.

The TPMS sensor matching process is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Place the vehicle in ServiceMode. See Ignition Positions0 195.

3. Make sure the Tire Pressure infodisplay option is turned on. Theinfo displays on the DIC can beturned on and off through theSettings menu. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 143.

4. Use the five-way DIC control onthe right side of the steeringwheel to scroll to the TirePressure screen under the DICinfo page. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 143.

5. Press and hold SEL in the centerof the five-way DIC control.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool against thetire sidewall, near the valve stem.Then press the button to activatethe TPMS sensor. A horn chirpconfirms that the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to this tire and wheelposition.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensor

matching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.


12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressure levelas indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspected forsigns of wear or damage at leastonce a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire canbe seen.

. There is cord or fabric showingthrough the tire's rubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snagged deepenough to show cord or fabric.


306 VEHICLE CARE

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 341.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. The firstrotation is the most important.

Anytime unusual wear is noticed,rotate the tires as soon aspossible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment.See When It Is Time for New Tires0 307 and Wheel Replacement0 311.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label after the tireshave been rotated.See Tire Pressure 0 299 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 189.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 302.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 353.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towelcan be used; however, use a scraperor wire brush later to remove allrust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change or tirerotation to prevent corrosion orrust build-up. Do not get greaseon the flat wheel mountingsurface or on the wheel nuts orbolts.


VEHICLE CARE 307

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds, vehicleloading, and road conditions affect thewear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) orless of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators.See Tire Inspection 0 305 and TireRotation 0 306 for additionalinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factors includingtemperatures, loading conditions, andinflation pressure maintenance affecthow fast aging takes place. GMrecommends that tires, including thespare if equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. The firsttwo digits represent the week (01-52)and the last two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Park avehicle that will be stored for at leasta month in a cool, dry, clean areaaway from direct sunlight to slowaging. This area should be free ofgrease, gasoline, or other substancesthat can deteriorate rubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires that mayresult in vibrations while driving.When storing a vehicle for at least amonth, remove the tires or raise thevehicle to reduce the weight from thetires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. When replacement tires areneeded, GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of the vehicle,including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM'sTPC Spec number is molded onto


308 VEHICLE CARE

the tire's sidewall near the tiresize. If the tires have an all-seasontread design, the TPC Specnumber will be followed by MS formud and snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 295 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handling performancemay be adversely affected if all thetires are not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done, allfour tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 306 for information onproper tire rotation. However, if itis necessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount ordismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may cause lossof control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires onall wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installed onthe vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tire and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

wheel assembly with a similaroverall diameter as the roadtires and wheels, so it is allright to drive on it. The sparetire was developed for use onthis vehicle and will not affectvehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheel rimflanges to develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenlyand cause a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheelson the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H, V,W, Y and ZR speed rated tires.Never exceed the winter tires’


VEHICLE CARE 309

maximum speed capability whenusing winter tires with a lowerspeed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, loadrange, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low-pressure warning ifnon-TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 301.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel indicates the originalequipment tires on the vehicle.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 189 forthe label location and moreinformation about the Tire andLoading Information label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed that area different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also be affected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. This increasesthe chance of a crash and seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheeland tire systems developed for thevehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a GM certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires 0 307 andAccessories and Modifications 0 260.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in theUnited States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The UniformTire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deeptread, winter tires, compact sparetires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must


310 VEHICLE CARE

also conform to federal safetyrequirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) standards.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half(1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relative

performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differencesin road characteristics andclimate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire'sability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlledconditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance. Warning: Thetraction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representingthe tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its abilityto dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passengercar tires must meet under theFederal Motor Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.Warning: The temperature gradefor this tire is established for a tirethat is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive


VEHICLE CARE 311

loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were aligned andbalanced at the factory to provide thelongest tire life and best overallperformance. Adjustments to wheelalignment and tire balancing are notnecessary on a regular basis. Consideran alignment check if there is unusualtire wear or the vehicle is significantlypulling to one side or the other. Someslight pull to the left or right,depending on the crown of the roadand/or other road surface variationssuch as troughs or ruts, is normal.If the vehicle is vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, the tires andwheels may need to be rebalanced.See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts

should be replaced. If the wheel leaksair, replace it. Some aluminum wheelscan be repaired. See your dealer if anyof these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter,width, offset, and be mounted thesame way as the one it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors with new GM originalequipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nutscan be dangerous. It could affectthe braking and handling of thevehicle. Tires can lose air, andcause loss of control, causing acrash. Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim, bumperheight, vehicle ground clearance,and tire or tire chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a used oneis dangerous. How it has been usedor how far it has been driven maybe unknown. It could fail suddenlyand cause a crash. When replacingwheels, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.


312 VEHICLE CARE

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains usedon a vehicle without the properamount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension,or other vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chains couldcause loss of control and a crash.Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle's tiresize combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowlyand readjust or remove the tractiondevice if it contacts the vehicle. Donot spin the wheels. If tractiondevices are used, install them onthe rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tires aremaintained properly. If air goes out ofa tire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire createsa drag that pulls the vehicle towardthat side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to astop, well off the road, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid and mayrequire the same correction as used ina skid. Stop pressing the acceleratorpedal and steer to straighten thevehicle. It may be very bumpy andnoisy. Gently brake to a stop, well offthe road, if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash. Neverattempt to re-inflate a tire that hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat. Have yourdealer or an authorized tire servicecenter repair or replace the flat tireas soon as possible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. If ajack is provided with the vehicle, itis designed only for changing a flattire. If it is used for anything else,you or others could be badly injuredor killed if the vehicle slips off the

(Continued)


VEHICLE CARE 313

Warning (Continued)

jack. If a jack is provided with thevehicle, only use it for changing aflat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers 0 165.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can be dangerous.The vehicle can slip off the jack androll over or fall causing injury ordeath. Find a level place to changethe tire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

3. For vehicles with four-wheeldrive with an N (Neutral)transfer case position, be surethe transfer case is in a drivegear — not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

6. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the opposite cornerof the tire being changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as a guideto assist in the placement of thewheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and change a tire.

Tire ChangingBefore changing a flat tire, see“Hands-Free Operation” under Liftgate0 41.

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment needed to change aflat tire is stored in the rear of thevehicle, on the driver side, behind adoor in the trim panel.


314 VEHICLE CARE

1. Jack Knob2. Wing Nut Retaining the

Wheel Blocks3. Wing Nut Retaining the

Tool Bag

If equipped, the tow eye boltwill be in a bag secured tothe tool bag.

1. Pull to open the trim panel door.

The third row driver side seatmay need to be folded to accessthe trim panel door.

2. Lift the acoustic pad to accessthe jack and tools.

3. Turn the wing nut retaining thetool bag (3) counterclockwise toremove it.

Pull the tool bag toward the frontof the vehicle and lift the rearportion of the bag upward toremove it.

4. Turn the jack knob (1)counterclockwise to release thejack and wheel blocks from thebracket.

5. Turn the wing nut retaining thewheel blocks (2)counterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks and the wheel blockretainer.

Use the following tools:

1. Jack2. Wheel Blocks3. Jack Handle4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench


VEHICLE CARE 315

To access the spare tire, refer to thefollowing graphics and instructions:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)10. Tire/Wheel Retainer11. Hoist Cable

1. Open the hoist shaft accessdoor (3) on the bumper to accessthe spare tire lock (6).

If equipped with a hitch cover,turn the hitch cover retainerscounterclockwise and pull thecover downward to remove itbefore removing the hoist shaftaccess door.

2. To remove the spare tire lock (6),insert the key located inside theremote, turn it clockwise, andthen pull it straight out.

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5), as shown.


316 VEHICLE CARE

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the hole inthe rear bumper (8) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (7) connects to thehoist shaft. The ribbed squareend of the extension is used tolower the spare tire.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

6. Use the wheel wrench hook topull the hoist cable closer toassist in reaching the spare tire.

7. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.Tilt the retainer and pull it andthe cable and spring through thecenter of the wheel.

Once the retainer is separatedfrom the guide pin, tilt theretainer and pull it through thecenter of the wheel along withthe cable and latch.

8. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat0 312 for more information.

2. If the vehicle has a center capthat covers the wheel fasteners,place the chisel end of the wheelwrench in the slot on the wheeland gently pry the cap out.


VEHICLE CARE 317

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Turn thewheel wrench counterclockwiseto loosen the wheel nuts. Do notremove the wheel nuts yet.

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

Left Front Shown, Right Front Similar

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a front tire of the vehicle, usethe jack handle and only onejack handle extension. Attach thewheel wrench to the jack handleextension. Attach the jack handleto the jack. Position the jack onthe frame behind the flat tirewhere the frame sections overlap.Turn the wheel wrench clockwiseto raise the vehicle. Raise thevehicle far enough off the groundso there is enough room for thespare tire to clear the ground.

Rear Position

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a rear tire of the vehicle, usethe jack handle (2) and both jackhandle extensions (3). Attach thewheel wrench (4) to the jackhandle extensions (3). Attach thejack handle (2) to the jack (1).Use the jacking pad (5) providedon the rear axle. Turn the wheelwrench (4) clockwise to raise thevehicle. Raise the vehicle farenough off the ground so there isenough room for the spare tire toclear the ground.


318 VEHICLE CARE

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, you couldbe badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damagethe vehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sureto fit the jack lift head into theproper location before raising thevehicle.

5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

6. Take off the flat tire.

7. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towelcan be used; however, use a scraperor wire brush later to remove allrust or dirt.

8. Put the wheel nuts back on withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel after mountingthe spare tire.


VEHICLE CARE 319

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on bolts ornuts because the nuts might comeloose. The vehicle's wheel could falloff, causing a crash.

9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand.Then use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts until the wheelis held against the hub.

10. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

11. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shown byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can cause thewheels to become loose or come off.The wheel nuts should be tightenedwith a torque wrench to the propertorque specification after replacing.Follow the torque specificationsupplied by the aftermarketmanufacturer when using accessorylocking wheel nuts. See Capacitiesand Specifications 0 353 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensive

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

brake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torquespecification. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 353 for the wheelnut torque specification.

When reinstalling the regular wheeland tire, also reinstall the center cap,if equipped. Line up the tab on thecenter cap with the slot in the wheel.The cap only goes in one way. Placethe cap on the wheel and press until itsnaps into place.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or

(Continued)


320 VEHICLE CARE

Warning (Continued)

collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Caution

Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for anextended period of time or with thevalve stem pointing up can damagethe wheel. Always stow the wheelwith the valve stem pointing downand have the wheel/tire repaired assoon as possible.

Caution

The tire hoist can be damaged ifthere is no tension on the cablewhen using it. To have thenecessary tension, the spare or roadtire and wheel assembly must beinstalled on the tire hoist to use it.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier. Referto the following graphics andinstructions:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)10. Tire/Wheel Retainer

11. Hoist Cable

1. Put the tire (9) on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down, and tothe rear.

2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle.Separate the tire/wheel retainerfrom the guide pin. Pull the pinthrough the center of the wheel.Tilt the retainer down throughthe center wheel opening.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.


VEHICLE CARE 321

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5).

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the hole inthe rear bumper (8) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer is seatedin the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Thecable cannot be overtightened.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and then tryto turn the tire. If the tire moves,use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft accesscover.

If equipped, reinstall the hitchcover and turn the retainersclockwise.

To store the tools:

1. Return the tools (wheel wrench,jack handle, and jack handleextensions) to the tool bag.

2. Assemble the wheel blocks andjack together with the wing nut.

3. Position the jack and wheelblocks in the driver side trimpanel over the wheelhouse.

4. Turn the jack knob clockwiseuntil the jack is secured tight inthe mounting bracket. Be sure toposition the holes in the base ofthe jack onto the pin in themounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket tofasten the tool bag on the studand turn the wing nut clockwiseto secure.

6. Close the trim panel door.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly.See Tire Pressure 0 299 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 189. For instructions onhow to remove, install, or store aspare tire, see Tire Changing 0 313.


322 VEHICLE CARE

If equipped with a temporary usefull-size spare tire, it is indicated onthe tire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 295. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph) whenpulling a trailer, at the properinflation pressure. Repair and replacethe road tire as soon as it isconvenient, and stow the spare tire forfuture use.

Caution

If the vehicle has four-wheel driveand a different size spare tire isinstalled, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until the flat tire is repairedand/or replaced. The vehicle couldbe damaged and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the warranty.Never use four-wheel drive when adifferent size spare tire is installedon the vehicle.

The vehicle may have a different sizespare tire than the road tires originallyinstalled on the vehicle. This spare tirewas developed for use on this vehicle,so it is all right to drive on it. If the

vehicle has four-wheel drive and adifferent size spare tire is installed,drive only in two-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possible andcheck that the spare tire is correctlyinflated.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and its wheeltogether. If the vehicle has a spare tirethat does not match the original roadtires and wheels in size and type, donot include the spare in the tirerotation.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 275.

If the vehicle's battery has run down,you may want to use another vehicleand some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to use the followingsteps to do it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.Batteries also contain otherchemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer. WASHHANDS AFTER HANDLING. For

(Continued)


VEHICLE CARE 323

Warning (Continued)

more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition 65 Warning0 259 and the back cover.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of these thingscan hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to the vehicle thatwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Trying to start the vehicleby pushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not have a12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Get the vehicles close enough sothe jumper cables can reach, butbe sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause an unwanted

ground connection. You wouldnot be able to start your vehicle,and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.For vehicles withfour-wheel-drive with aN (Neutral) transfer caseposition, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — notN (Neutral).

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Wheneverpossible, turn off or unplug allaccessories on either vehicle whenjump starting.


324 VEHICLE CARE

3. Turn the ignition off on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turn offthe radio and all the lamps thatare not needed. This will avoidsparks and help save bothbatteries. And it could save theradio!

4. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminallocations on that vehicle.

The positive (+) terminal is undera red plastic cover at the positivebattery post. To uncover thepositive (+) terminal, open thered plastic cover.

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remote negative(−) terminals, see EngineCompartment Overview 0 262.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not running andcan injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode. Peoplehave been hurt doing this, andsome have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you.If you accidentally get it in youreyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical helpimmediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engine partscan injure you badly. Keep yourhands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−) willgo to a heavy, unpainted metalengine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect the


VEHICLE CARE 325

negative (−) cable to the negative(−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cableto the positive (+) terminal of thevehicle with the dead battery.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalof the good battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to the metalbracket that is bolted to theengine and supports theresonator, on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

10. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.

Caution

If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order,electrical shorting may occur anddamage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always connect andremove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicle andremoving the jumper cables, allow itto idle for several minutes.


326 VEHICLE CARE

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Do not lash or hook to suspensioncomponents. Use the proper strapsaround the tires to secure thevehicle.

Use only a flatbed tow truck fortowing a disabled vehicle. Never use asling type lift or damage will occur.Use ramps to help reduce approachangles if necessary. A towed vehicleshould have its drive wheels off theground.

Consult a professional towing serviceif the disabled vehicle must be towed.

Front Attachment Points

The vehicle is equipped with specificattachment points to be used to pullthe vehicle onto a flatbed car carrierfrom a flat road surface. Do not usethese attachment points to pull thevehicle from snow, mud or sand.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are dinghyand dolly towing. Dinghy towing is

towing the vehicle with all four wheelson the ground. Dolly towing is towingthe vehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels on a dolly.

Follow the tow vehicle manufacturer’sinstructions. See your dealer ortrailering professional for additionaladvice and equipmentrecommendations.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in front ofthe vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.If using a shield, only use one thatattaches to the towing vehicle.


VEHICLE CARE 327

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

If the two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with all four wheels on theground, the drivetrain componentscould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drivevehicles with a two-speed transfercase that have an N (Neutral) and aFour-Wheel Drive Low (4 n) setting.

{ Warning

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle'stransfer case into N (Neutral) cancause the vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in P (Park). You orothers could be injured. Set theparking brake before shifting thetransfer case to N (Neutral).

To dinghy tow:

1. Position the vehicle being towedbehind the tow vehicle, facingforward and on a level surface.

2. Securely attach the vehicle beingtowed to the tow vehicle.

3. Apply the parking brake andstart the engine.

For vehicles with Electric ParkingBrakes (EPB), the EPB cannot beapplied and the tires must bechocked.

4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 207. Check that thevehicle is in N (Neutral) byshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

5. Shift the transmission intoD (Drive). Turn the engine off.


328 VEHICLE CARE

Caution

Failure to disconnect the negativebattery cable or to have it contactthe terminals can cause damage tothe vehicle.

6. Disconnect the negative batterycable at the battery and securethe nut and bolt. Cover thenegative battery post with anon-conductive material toprevent any contact with thenegative battery terminal.

7. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

Caution

If the steering column is locked,vehicle damage may occur.

8. Move the steering wheel to makesure the steering column isunlocked.

9. With a foot on the brake pedal,release the parking brake.

10. If equipped with Keyless Access,keep the RKE transmitter outsideof the vehicle, and manually lockthe doors. Access the vehicle asif it has a dead RKE transmitterbattery, by using the key in thedoor lock.

Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle

Before disconnecting the towedvehicle:

1. Park on a level surface.

2. Set the parking brake, then shiftthe transmission to P (Park).

3. Connect the battery.

4. Apply the brake pedal.

5. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off. Shift thetransfer case out of N (Neutral)to 2 m. See “Shifting out ofN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 207. See your dealer ifthe transfer case cannot beshifted out of N (Neutral).

6. Check that the vehicle is in 2 mby starting the engine andshifting the transmission to

R (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should bemovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

7. Shift the transmission to P (Park)and turn off the ignition.

8. Disconnect the vehicle from thetow vehicle.


10. Reset any lost presets.

The outside temperature displaywill default to 0 °C (32 °F) butwill reset with normal usage.


VEHICLE CARE 329

Dolly Towing – Front Towing(Front Wheels Off the Ground)

Caution

If a two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with the rear wheels on theground, the transmission could bedamaged. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never tow the vehicle with the rearwheels on the ground.

Caution

Towing a four-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,or even with only two of its wheelson the ground, will damagedrivetrain components. Do not towa four-wheel-drive vehicle with anyof its wheels on the ground.

This vehicle should not be towed withthe rear wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground) –Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

Towing a four-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,or even with only two of its wheelson the ground, will damagedrivetrain components. Do not towa four-wheel-drive vehicle with anyof its wheels on the ground.

This vehicle should not be towed withany wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground) –Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles


330 VEHICLE CARE

To dolly tow the vehicle from the rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake 0 212 orParking Brake 0 211.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clamping devicedesigned for towing to ensurethat the front wheels are lockedinto the straight position.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants0 349.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish, washit often and out of direct sunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents as theycan damage the vehicle's paint,metal, or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Approvedcleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regarding

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

correct product usage, necessarysafety precautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Caution

Do not power wash any component

under the hood that has thisesymbol.

This could cause damage thatwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.


VEHICLE CARE 331

If using an automatic car wash, followthe car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that may bedamaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, before washingand after, to remove all cleaningagents completely. If they are allowedto dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfaces aredamaged, see your dealer to have thedamage assessed and repaired. Foreignmaterials such as calcium chlorideand other salts, ice melting agents,road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage thevehicle's finish if they remain onpainted surfaces. Wash the vehicle assoon as possible. If necessary, use

non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. See yourdealer for approved cleaning products.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals,simulated wood, or flat paint asdamage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damageit. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish onthe vehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can result ina hazy white finish or pitting. Thisdamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome orstainless steel. To prevent damagealways follow these cleaninginstructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool to thetouch before applying any cleaningsolution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chrome orstainless steel. Some cleaners arehighly acidic or contain alkalinesubstances and can damage themoldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.


332 VEHICLE CARE

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses,Emblems, Decals, and Stripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems,decals, and stripes. Follow instructionsunder "Washing the Vehicle"previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic, andsome have a UV protective coating. Donot clean or wipe them when dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or otherharsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessive heatgenerated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properly cancause damage to the lamp coverthat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss black finishstripes can increase the gloss leveland create a non-uniform finish.Clean low gloss stripes with soapand water only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning the blades.Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildupof vehicle wash/wax treatments maycause wiper streaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dusty conditions,sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks from rubbermaterial on painted surfaces can beremoved by rubbing with a cleancloth. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 349.


VEHICLE CARE 333

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on the vehicle maydamage the paint finish and/ortires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray fromall painted surfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim— Aluminum orChrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soapand water to clean the wheels. Afterrinsing thoroughly with clean water,dry with a soft, clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if the vehicleis not washed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed with

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

magnesium, calcium, or sodiumchloride. These chlorides are usedon roads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash the chromewith soap and water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes,or cleaners that contain acid onaluminum or chrome-plated wheels.Use only approved cleaners. Also,never drive a vehicle withaluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash thatuses silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occur andthe repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines and hosesfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brakepads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect allother brake parts.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering, suspension,and chassis components for damaged,loose, or missing parts or signs ofwear at least once a year.

Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

For 1500 Series vehicles, at least everyother oil change lubricate the outer tierod ends.

Control arm ball joints on 1500 Seriesvehicles are maintenance-free.


334 VEHICLE CARE

Caution

Lubrication of applicable steering/suspension points should not bedone unless the temperature is−12 °C (10 °F) or higher, or damagecould result.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hoodhinges, liftgate hinges, steel fuel doorhinge and power assist step hinges,unless the components are plastic.Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush any corrosivematerials from the underbody. Takecare to thoroughly clean any areaswhere mud and other debris cancollect. If equipped with power assiststeps, extend them and then use ahigh pressure wash to clean all jointsand gaps.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfer caseand/or axles and should be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged and requiressheet metal repair or replacement,make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restorecorrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care” previously inthis section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’s interior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mild soapsolution, immediately remove handlotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designed forthe surfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply all cleanersdirectly to the cleaning cloth. Do notspray cleaners on any switches orcontrols. Remove cleaners quickly.


VEHICLE CARE 335

Before using cleaners, read and followall safety instructions on the label.While cleaning the interior, open thedoors and windows to get properventilation.

To prevent damage, do not clean theinterior using the following cleanersor techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surface aggressivelyor with too much pressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners, useapproximately 20 drops per 3.8 L(1 gal) of water. A concentratedsoap solution will create streaksand attract dirt. Do not usesolutions that contain strong orcaustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercial glasscleaner after cleaning with plain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six months ofownership will reduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will not bedamaged. Clean spots with water andmild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surface usinga soft brush attachment. If a rotatingvacuum brush attachment is beingused, only use it on the floor carpet.Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as much aspossible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.


336 VEHICLE CARE

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completely removed,it may be necessary to use acommercial upholstery cleaner or spotlifter. Test a small hidden area forcolorfastness before using acommercial upholstery cleaner or spotlifter. If ring formation occurs, cleanthe entire fabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First, usea soft bristle brush to remove dirt thatcan scratch the surface. Then gentlyclean by rubbing with a microfibercloth. Never use window cleaners orsolvents. Periodically hand wash themicrofiber cloth separately, using mildsoap. Do not use bleach or fabricsoftener. Rinse thoroughly and air drybefore next use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. This maycause damage and would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl,Other Plastic Surfaces, LowGloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber cloth dampenedwith water to remove dust and loosedirt. For a more thorough cleaning,use a soft microfiber cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, as wellas other interior surfaces, maycause permanent damage. Wipeexcess moisture from these surfacesafter cleaning and allow them todry naturally. Never use heat,steam, or spot removers. Do not usecleaners that contain silicone orwax-based products. Cleanerscontaining these solvents canpermanently change the appearanceand feel of leather or soft trim, andare not recommended.


VEHICLE CARE 337

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plastics andpainted surfaces. If an air freshenercomes in contact with any plasticor painted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorine bleach.Rinse with cold water, and then drycompletely.

Care of Seat Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, they mightnot be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean and rinse seat beltwebbing only with mild soap andlukewarm water. Allow the webbingto dry.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size or isnot properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distancewhich can cause a crash and injury.Make sure the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:

. The original equipment floor matswere designed for your vehicle.If the floor mats need replacing, itis recommended that GM certifiedfloor mats be purchased. Non-GMfloor mats may not fit properlyand may interfere with the pedals.Always check that the floor matsdo not interfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with the correctside up. Do not turn it over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat on thedriver side.

. Do not place one floor mat on topof another.


338 VEHICLE CARE

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor mat tounlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does not interferewith the pedals.


SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 339

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Cadillac Premium CareMaintenanceCadillac Premium CareMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Special Application ServicesSpecial Application Services . . . . . 346

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describes therequired maintenance for the vehicle.Follow this schedule to help protectagainst major repair expensesresulting from neglect or inadequatemaintenance. It may also help tomaintain the value of the vehicle if itis sold. It is the responsibility of theowner to have all requiredmaintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and online schedulingto assist with service needs.

Your dealer recognizes the importanceof providing competitively pricedmaintenance and repair services. Withtrained technicians, the dealer is theplace for routine maintenance such asoil changes and tire rotations and


340 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

additional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, and lubricantsare important to keep the vehicle ingood working condition.

Do not have chemical flushes thatare not approved by GM performedon the vehicle. The use of flushes,solvents, cleaners, or lubricants thatare not approved by GM coulddamage the vehicle, requiringexpensive repairs that are notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps to

keep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy, andreduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be more frequentchecks and services. The AdditionalRequired Services - Normal are forvehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 189.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal driving limits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel 0 243.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain

. Frequently towing a trailer

. Used for high speed or competitivedriving

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can cause seriousinjury. Perform maintenance workonly if the required information,proper tools, and equipment areavailable. If they are not, see yourdealer to have a trained techniciando the work. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 260.



Cadillac Premium CareMaintenanceThis vehicle comes with CadillacPremium Care Maintenance. It is amaintenance program that coversselect services, when scheduled inaccordance with the owner’s manual,including:

. Oil changes based on the vehicle'soil life monitor system.

. Tire rotation every 12 000 km(7,500 mi).

. Passenger compartment air filterreplacement.

. Multi-point vehicle inspection(MPVI) performed by a qualifiedtechnician.

Cadillac requires that all CadillacPremium Care Maintenance servicesbe performed by a Cadillac authorizedservice dealer.

Maintenance ScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 263.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure 0 299.

. Inspect the tires for wear. See TireInspection 0 305.

. Check the windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 272.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, the engineoil life system may not indicate theneed for vehicle service for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and theoil life system must be reset. Yourtrained dealer technician can performthis work. If the engine oil life system

is reset accidentally, service thevehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 mi sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System 0 265.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform the followingservices. See Tire Rotation 0 306.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed, changeengine oil and filter, and reset oillife system.See Engine Oil 0 263 and Engine OilLife System 0 265.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeCooling System 0 268.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 272.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare 0 330. Replace worn ordamaged wiper blades. See WiperBlade Replacement 0 278.



. Check tire inflation pressures. SeeTire Pressure 0 299.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 305.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 267.

. Inspect brake system. See ExteriorCare 0 330.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear.See Exterior Care 0 330.

. Lubricate the suspension andsteering components at least everyother oil change (if equipped withgrease fittings).

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 82.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields for looseor damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 330.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 277.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission Shift LockControl Function Check 0 278.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check 0 278.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut for signsof wear, cracks, or other damage.Check the hold open ability of thestrut. If the hold open is low,service the gas strut. See GasStrut(s) 0 280.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 56.

. Verify spare tire key lock operationand lubricate as needed. See TireChanging 0 313.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Normal

12000km/7

,500mi

24000km/1

5,000mi

36000km/2

2,500mi

48000km/3

0,000mi

60000km/3

7,500mi

72000km/4

5,000mi

84000km/5

2,500mi

96000km/6

0,000mi

108000km/6

7,500mi

120000km/7

5,000mi

132000km/8

2,500mi

144000km/9

0,000mi

156000km/9

7,500mi

168000km/1

05,000mi

180000km/1

12,500mi

192000km/1

20,000mi

204000km/1

27,500mi

216000km/1

35,000mi

228000km/1

42,500mi

240000km/1

50,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services. Checkengine oil level and oil life percentage. Changeengine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)



Footnotes — Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequent passengercompartment air filter replacementmay be needed if driving in areas withheavy traffic, poor air quality, highdust levels, or environmentalallergens. Passenger compartment airfilter replacement may also be neededif there is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealer canhelp determine when to replace thefilter.

(2) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for proper attachment,connection, routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe transfer case fluid. Contaminated

fluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles and shouldbe replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System 0 268.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 274.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Severe

12000km/7

,500mi

24000km/1

5,000mi

36000km/2

2,500mi

48000km/3

0,000mi

60000km/3

7,500mi

72000km/4

5,000mi

84000km/5

2,500mi

96000km/6

0,000mi

108000km/6

7,500mi

120000km/7

5,000mi

132000km/8

2,500mi

144000km/9

0,000mi

156000km/9

7,500mi

168000km/1

05,000mi

180000km/1

12,500mi

192000km/1

20,000mi

204000km/1

27,500mi

216000km/1

35,000mi

228000km/1

42,500mi

240000km/1

50,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services. Checkengine oil level and oil life percentage. Changeengine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Footnotes — Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequent passengercompartment air filter replacementmay be needed if driving in areas withheavy traffic, poor air quality, highdust levels, or environmental

allergens. Passenger compartment airfilter replacement may also be neededif there is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealer canhelp determine when to replace thefilter.

(2) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for proper attachment,connection, routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe transfer case fluid. Contaminated



fluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles and shouldbe replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System 0 268.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 274.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use Vehicles

Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every oil change.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care0 330.

Additional Maintenanceand CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additional maintenanceservices may be required.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — their traineddealer technicians know your vehiclebest. Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti-point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditions tolook for that may indicate services arerequired.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies power tostart the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.

. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.



. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs of crackingor splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipment toinspect the belts and recommendadjustment or replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and are crucialto safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipment toinspect the brakes and recommendquality parts engineered for thevehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approved fluidsprotect the vehicle’s systems andcomponents. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants 0 349 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshield washerfluid levels should be checked atevery fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to be filled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and should beregularly inspected to ensure thatthere are no cracks or leaks. With amulti-point inspection, your dealercan inspect the hoses and advise ifreplacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage. The

brake lamps need to be checkedperiodically to ensure that theylight when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may include steeringwheel vibration, bounce/swaywhile braking, longer stoppingdistance, or uneven tire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs ofleaking, blown seals, or damage,and can advise when service isneeded.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.



. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in the treador sidewall; or a bulge or split inthe tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can also providetire/wheel balancing services toensure smooth vehicle operationat all speeds. Your dealer sells andservices name brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 334 andExterior Care 0 330.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliver optimalwear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment may needto be adjusted include pulling,improper vehicle handling,or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure proper wheelalignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and the bestviewing, keep the windshield cleanand clear.

. Signs of damage include scratches,cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacement ifneeded.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleaned andkept in good condition to provide aclear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades and replacethem when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission DEXRON ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19352619, inCanada 19352620).

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. SeeCooling System 0 268.

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscosity grade.ACDelco dexos1 is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 263.

Front Axle (4WD Only) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19353126, in Canada 19299819).

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges, BodyDoor Hinge Pins, Power Assist Steps,Liftgate Hinge, Linkage, and Outer

Liftgate Handle Pivot Points, and FuelDoor Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Rear Axle SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, inCanada 19300458).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Transfer Case DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22845992 A3181C

Oil Filter 19330000 PF63E

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 23281440 CF188

Spark Plugs 12622441 41-114

Wiper Blades

Front Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331 —

Front Passenger Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331 —

Rear – 33 cm (13.0 in) 22956295 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type ofservices performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed


352 TECHNICAL DATA

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Vehicle DataCapacities and Specifications . . . . 353Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . 355

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, on thedriver side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) also appears on theVehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and certificates of title andregistration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is theengine code. This code identifies thevehicle's engine, specifications, andreplacement parts. See “EngineSpecifications” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 353 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service Parts IdentificationLabelThere may be a label on the inside ofthe glove box that contains thefollowing information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Model designation

. Paint information

. Production options and specialequipment

If there is no label, there is a barcodeon the certification label on thecenter (B) pillar to scan for this sameinformation.


TECHNICAL DATA 353

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants0 349 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 16.8 L 17.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Short Wheelbase 98.4 L 26.0 gal

Long Wheelbase 119.2 L 31.5 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.Recheck fluid level after filling.


354 TECHNICAL DATA

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

6.2L V8 J 0.95–1.10mm (0.037–0.043 in)


TECHNICAL DATA 355

Engine Drive Belt Routing


356 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Customer Assistance Offices . . . . 358Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . 358

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . 363Service Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . 365

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects to theUnited States Government . . . . . 366

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . 366

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . 367OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toCadillac. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or the operationof the vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer's sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned,misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following stepsshould be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If thematter has already been reviewed withthe sales, service or parts manager,contact the owner of your dealershipor the general manager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management, itappears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership without


CUSTOMER INFORMATION 357

further help, in the U.S., call theCadillac Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800–458–8006. In Canada, callthe Canadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre at 1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call the toll-freenumber in order to give your inquiryprompt attention. Have the followinginformation available to give theCustomer Assistance representative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date and presentmileage.

When contacting Cadillac, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners : BothGeneral Motors and your dealer arecommitted to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with the new

vehicle. However, if you continue toremain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, you can file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto LineProgram to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administered bythe Council of Better Business Bureausto settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or theinterpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-free telephonenumber or write them at the followingaddress:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.3033 Wilson BoulevardSuite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District of Columbia.Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/ordiscontinue its participation in thisprogram.

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners :In the event that you do not feel yourconcerns have been addressed afterfollowing the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, General Motors ofCanada Company wants you to beaware of its participation in ano-charge mediation/arbitrationprogram. General Motors of CanadaCompany has committed to binding



arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims.The program provides for the reviewof the facts involved by an impartialthird party arbiter, and may includean informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe Cadillac Customer Care Centre,1-888-446-2000, or write to:

General Motors Cadillac CustomerCare CentreGeneral Motors of Canada CompanyMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesCadillac encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Cadillac, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169www.Cadillac.com

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Service: 1-800-224-1400

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada CompanyCadillac Customer Care Centre, MailCode: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-888-446-2000 (English/French)Cadillac Roadside Service:1-800-882-1112

Overseas

Contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Cadillac has TTY equipment availableat its Customer Assistance Center. AnyTTY user can communicate withCadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-2622.TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.



Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience (U.S.)my.cadillac.com

The Cadillac online owner experienceallows interaction with Cadillac andkeeps important vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E : Download owner’s manuals andview vehicle-specific how-to videos.

G : View maintenance schedules,alerts, and OnStar onboard vehiclediagnostic information. Scheduleservice appointments.

I : View printable dealer-recordedservice records and self-recordedservice records.

D : Select a dealer and viewlocations, maps, phone numbers, andhours.

r : Track your vehicle’s warrantyinformation.

J : View active recalls or search byVehicle Identification Number (VIN).See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 352.

H : View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio (if equipped), and OnStaraccount information.

F : Chat with online helprepresentatives.

See my.cadillac.com to register yourvehicle.

Cadillac Owner Centre (Canada)cadillacowner.ca

Visit the Cadillac Owner Centre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Locate owner resources such aslease-end, financing, and warrantyinformation.

. Retrieve favorite articles, quizzes,tips, and multimedia galleriesorganized into the FeaturedArticles and Auto Care Sections.

. Download owner’s manuals.

. Find Cadillac-recommendedmaintenance services.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available to qualifiedapplicants for cost reimbursement, upto certain limits, of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such as handcontrols or a wheelchair/scooter liftfor the vehicle.

To learn about the GM Mobilityprogram, see www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has aMobility program. See www.gm.ca orcall 1-800-GM-DRIVE (800-463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.



Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-800-224-1400.

Canada: 1-800-882-1112.

Text Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.Only): 1-888-889-2438.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Service

When calling Roadside Service, havethe following information ready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

. Telephone number of yourlocation

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided for the durationof the vehicle’s powertrain warranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicleis covered. In Canada, a person drivingthe vehicle without permission fromthe owner is not covered.

Roadside Service is not a part of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andCadillac reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the RoadsideService program at any time withoutnotification.

General Motors North America andCadillac reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.

For security reasons, the drivermust present identification beforethis service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Cadillac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is not givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with a spare tire.The spare tire, if equipped, mustbe in good condition and properlyinflated. It is your responsibilityfor the repair or replacement ofthe tire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: If your trip is interrupteddue to a warranty failure,incidental expenses may bereimbursed during the Powertrainwarranty period. Items considered



are hotel, meals, and rental car ora vehicle being delivered back tothe customer, up to 500 miles.

Cadillac Technician RoadsideService (U.S. Only)

Cadillac's exceptional Roadside Serviceis more than an auto club or towingservice. It provides every Cadillacowner in the United States with theadvantage of contacting a Cadillacadvisor and, where available, aCadillac trained dealer technician whocan provide on-site service.

A dealer technician will travel to yourlocation within a 30-mile radius of aparticipating Cadillac dealership.If beyond this radius, we will arrangeto have your car towed to the nearestCadillac dealership. Each techniciantravels with a specially equippedservice vehicle complete with thenecessary Cadillac parts and toolsrequired to handle most roadsiderepairs.

Services Not Included inRoadside Service. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws

. Legal fines

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices

Service is not provided if a vehicle isin an area that is not accessible to theservice vehicle or is not a regularlytraveled or maintained public road,which includes ice and winter roads.Off-road use is not covered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is

up to 7 liters. Diesel fuel deliverymay be restricted. Propane andother fuels are not providedthrough this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: Pre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy of therepair orders are required. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Service advisor willhelp you make arrangements andexplain how to receive payment.Items considered are hotel, meals,

and rental car or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer, upto 800 km.

. Alternative Service: If assistancecannot be provided right away, theRoadside Service advisor may giveyou permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt toRoadside Service. Mechanicalfailures may be covered, howeverany cost for parts and labor forrepairs not covered by thewarranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointment andadvising the service consultant ofyour transportation needs, your dealercan help minimize yourinconvenience.



If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safetyrelated. If it is, please call yourdealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you are urgedto do so as early in the work day aspossible to allow for same-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada), extendedpowertrain, and/or hybrid-specificwarranties in both the U.S. andCanada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a partof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.A separate booklet entitled “LimitedWarranty and Owner AssistanceInformation” furnished with each newvehicle provides detailed warrantycoverage information.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, your dealermay offer the following transportationoptions:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters of yourdealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must be supportedby original receipts and within themaximum amount allowed by GM forshuttle service. If U.S. customersarrange their own transportation,

limited reimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by original receipts.See your dealer for information.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completed rentalagreement and meet state/provincial,local, and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. Additional fees suchas fuel usage charges, taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair are also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional Program Information

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at everydealer. Contact your dealer for specificavailability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in a collisionand it is damaged, have the damagerepaired by a qualified technicianusing the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorlyperformed collision repairs diminishthe vehicle resale value, and safetyperformance can be compromised insubsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as the parts

with which the vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine GM Collision parts arethe best choice to ensure that thevehicle's designed appearance,durability, and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain the GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses in priorcrashes. In most cases, the parts beingrecycled are from undamaged sectionsof the vehicle. A recycled originalequipment GM part may be anacceptable choice to maintain thevehicle's originally designedappearance and safety performance;however, the history of these parts isnot known. Such parts are not coveredby the GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any related failures arenot covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly,exhibit premature durability/corrosion

problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered bythe GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failurerelated to such parts is not covered bythat warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that you choosea collision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer may havea collision repair center withGM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or be ableto recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians andcomparable equipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. There aresignificant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by variousinsurance policy terms. Manyinsurance policies provide reducedprotection to the GM vehicle bylimiting compensation for damage



repairs by using aftermarket collisionparts. Some insurance companies willnot specify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your current insurancecarrier, consider switching to anotherinsurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Readthe lease carefully, as you may becharged at the end of the lease forpoor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of. Movethe vehicle only if its position putsyou in danger, or you are instructed tomove it by a police officer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involved inthe crash.

For emergency towing see RoadsideService 0 360.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number

. Driver license number

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number

. Vehicle license plate number

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of the damageto the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facility thatuses quality replacement parts. See“Collision Parts” earlier in this section.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an Airbag Inflates?0 88.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommends thatyou take an active role in its repair.If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take the vehiclethere, or have it towed there. Specifyto the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new GenuineGM parts or recycled original GMparts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by the GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits, yourinsurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts.Discuss this with the repairprofessional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember, if the vehicle isleased, you may be obligated to have



the vehicle repaired with Genuine GMparts, even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurance companyis paying for the repairs, you are notobligated to accept a repair valuationbased on that insurance company'scollision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you can havecontrol of the repair and parts choicesas long as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on the engines,transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,electrical, steering, body, etc.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operational

information about the vehicle. TheOwner’s Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner’s Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Service and Owner publications areavailable for many current and pastmodel year GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday – Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PMEastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see Helm,Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems that operateon a radio frequency that complieswith Part 15/Part 18 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Innovation, Scienceand Economic Development (ISED)Canada's RSP-100 / license-exemptRSS's / ICES-001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.



2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or GeneralMotors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of CanadaCompany. Call Transport Canadaat 1-800-333-0510; go to:

www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)

www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)



or write to:

Transport CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety DirectorateDefect Investigations and RecallsDivision80 Noel StreetGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000,or write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Company1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

In Mexico, call 01-800-466-0805.

In other Central America andCaribbean Countries, call52-722-236-0680.

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, to monitorthe conditions for airbag deploymentand deploy them in a crash, and,if equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may store datato help the dealer technician servicethe vehicle. Some modules may alsostore data about how the vehicle isoperated, such as rate of fuelconsumption or average speed. Thesemodules may retain personalpreferences, such as radio presets, seatpositions, and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with an eventdata recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-like



situations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle,data that will assist in understandinghow a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. The EDRin this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by theEDR under normal driving conditionsand no personal data (e.g., name,

gender, age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, suchas law enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the informationif they have access to the vehicle orthe EDR.

GM will not access these data or shareit with others except: with the consentof the vehicle owner or, if the vehicleis leased, with the consent of thelessee; in response to an officialrequest by police or similargovernment office; as part of GM'sdefense of litigation through thediscovery process; or, as required bylaw. Data that GM collects or receivesmay also be used for GM researchneeds or may be made available toothers for research purposes, where aneed is shown and the data is not tiedto a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStarIf the vehicle is equipped with OnStarand has an active service plan,additional data may be collectedthrough the OnStar system. Thisincludes information about thevehicle’s operation; collisions involvingthe vehicle; the use of the vehicle andits features; and, in certain situations,the location and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Additional Information0 375.

Infotainment SystemUsing the navigation system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. See theinfotainment manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.


ONSTAR 369

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle system thatcan connect to an OnStar Advisor forEmergency, Security, Navigation,Connections, and Diagnostics Services.OnStar services may require a paidservice plan and data plan. OnStarrequires the vehicle battery andelectrical system, cellular service, andGPS satellite signals to be availableand operating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency service providers.

OnStar may collect information aboutyou and your vehicle, includinglocation information. See OnStar UserTerms, Privacy Statement, andSoftware Terms for more detailsincluding system limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light is nextto the OnStar buttons. If the statuslight is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is active. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion.


370 ONSTAR

Press= to:

. Open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. See theinfotainment manual forinformation on how to use theOnStar app.

Or

. Make a call, end a call, or answeran incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.

. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fihotspot name or SSID andpassword, if equipped.

PressQ to connect to an Advisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check of thevehicle's key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan or respondto an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severe weatheror other crisis situations and findevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require an active,OnStar service plan (excludes BasicPlan). With Automatic CrashResponse, built-in sensors canautomatically alert a specially trainedOnStar Advisor who is immediatelyconnected in to the vehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, and relayimportant information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service provider tohelp with a flat tire, a battery jump,or an empty gas tank.


ONSTAR 371

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can block theengine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can work withlaw enforcement to gradually slowthe vehicle down.

Theft Alarm Notification

If equipped, if the doors are lockedand the vehicle alarm sounds, anotification by text, e-mail, or phonecall will be sent. If the vehicle isstolen, an OnStar Advisor can workwith authorities to recover the vehicle.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires a specificOnStar service plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice Commands During aPlanned Route

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion. For some vehicles, press= toopen the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. For othervehicles press= as follows.

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want to canceldirections?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds: “OK,request completed, thank you,goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given,then responds with “OnStarready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination



372 ONSTAR

2. Say “Get my destination.” Systemresponds with the address anddistance to the destination, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

Send Destination to Vehicle

Directions can be sent to the vehicle’snavigation screen, if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent to thenavigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following OnStar services helpwith staying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Ensuring Security

. Change the default passwords forthe Wi-Fi hotspot and myCadillacmobile app. Make these passwordsdifferent from each other and usea combination of letters, numbers,and symbols to increase thesecurity.

. Change the default name of theSSID (Service Set Identifier). Thisis your network’s name that isvisible to other wireless devices.Choose a unique name and avoidfamily names or vehicledescriptions.

OnStar Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-in Wi-Fihotspot that provides access to theInternet and web content at 4G LTEspeed. Up to seven mobile devices canbe connected. A data plan is required.Use the in-vehicle controls only whenit is safe to do so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press= to openthe OnStar app on theinfotainment display, then select

Wi-Fi Hotspot. On some vehicles,touch Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Settings onthe screen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on some vehicles,the connection type (no Internetconnection, 3G, 4G, 4G LTE), andsignal quality (poor, good,excellent).

3. To change the SSID or password,pressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTARto connect with an Advisor. Onsome vehicles, the SSID andpassword can be changed in theWi-Fi Hotspot menu.

After initial set-up, your vehicle’sWi-Fi hotspot will connectautomatically to your mobile devices.Manage data usage by turning Wi-Fion or off on your mobile device, byusing the myCadillac mobile app,or by contacting an OnStar Advisor.On some vehicles, Wi-Fi can also bemanaged from the Wi-FiHotspot menu.


ONSTAR 373

MyCadillac Mobile App (If Available)

Download the myCadillac mobile appto compatible Apple and Androidsmartphones. Cadillac users canaccess the following services from asmartphone:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send destinations to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map (U.S.market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

. Locate a dealer and scheduleservice.

. Request roadside assistance.

. Set a parking reminder with pindrop, take a photo, make a note,and set a timer.

. Connect with Cadillac on socialmedia.

For myCadillac mobile appinformation and compatibility, seewww.my.cadillac.com.

An active OnStar service, compatibledevice, factory-installed remote start,and power locks are required. Datarates apply. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor to unlockthe doors or sound the horn and flashthe lamps.

OnStar AtYourService

OnStar Advisors can provide offersfrom restaurants and retailers on yourroute, help locate hotels, or book aroom. These services vary by market.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling service, whichrequires available minutes.

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion. For some vehicles, press= toopen the OnStar app on theinfotainment display, then selectHands-Free calling. For other vehiclespress= as follows.

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds: “Call.Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds: “OK,calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Call.” System responds: “Call.Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”


374 ONSTAR

4. Say “Call.” System responds: “OK,dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsBy monitoring and reporting on thevehicle’s key systems, OnStarAdvanced Diagnostics provides a wayto keep up on maintenance.Capabilities vary by model. Seewww.onstar.com for details andsystem limitations. Message and data

rates may apply. Advanced Diagnosticsrequires an active OnStar paid serviceplan, e-mail address on file, andenrollment in Advanced Diagnostics.

Includes:

. Diagnostic Alerts: Set preferencesto receive real-time e-mails, texts,or monthly reports of the vehicle’shealth. Or pressQ to have anAdvisor initiate a remotediagnostic report.

. Proactive Alerts: Receive areal-time e-mail or text messageregarding potential issues with keyvehicle components, such as thebattery, fuel system, or startersystem. Alerts for potential issuesappear on the infotainmentdisplay. Proactive Alerts aredesigned to help predict specifictypes of issues based oninformation collected from thevehicle. Other factors may affectvehicle performance. Not all issueswill deliver alerts. In some cases, adealer service check may berequired to confirm the accuracyof the alerts.

. Dealer Maintenance Notification:Have the vehicle notify yourpreferred dealer when it is time formaintenance. Your dealer will thencontact you to set up anappointment.

To begin, pressQ to speak to anAdvisor, or see www.onstar.com.


ONSTAR 375

OnStar AdditionalInformationOnStar Smart Driver

OnStar Smart Driver providesinformation about driving behavior tohelp maximize overall vehicleperformance, reduce wear and tear,and enhance fuel efficiency. AnInsurance Discounts Eligibility featureis also offered within OnStar SmartDriver. See www.onstar.com for detailsregarding vehicle eligibility andsystem limitations.

OnStar, General Motors, and theiraffiliates are not insurance providers.Obtain insurance only from licensedinsurance providers.

In-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase. PressQto set up an account.

. With the OnStar Basic Plan, every60 days.

. After change in ownership and at90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring the Vehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)immediately to terminate your OnStarservices if the vehicle is disposed of,sold, transferred, or if the lease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStarservice options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, AdvancedVehicle Diagnostics, Remote Services,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn

Navigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Not allOnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full description ofOnStar services, system limitations,and OnStar User Terms, PrivacyStatement, and Software Terms:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with an Advisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place where OnStarhas an agreement with a wirelessservice provider for service in thatarea. The wireless service providermust also have coverage, networkcapacity, reception, and technologycompatible with OnStar services.Service involving location informationabout the vehicle cannot work unlessGPS signals are available,unobstructed, and compatible withthe OnStar hardware. OnStar servicesmay not work if the OnStar equipment


376 ONSTAR

is not properly installed or it has notbeen properly maintained.If equipment or software is added,connected, or modified, OnStarservices may not work. Otherproblems beyond the control ofOnStar — such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of the vehicle,damage to the vehicle in a crash,or wireless phone network congestionor jamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to help withphysical disabilities and medicalconditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc., thatmeets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability to communicateto deaf, hard-of-hearing,or speech-impaired customers while inthe vehicle. The availabledealer-installed TTY system canprovide in-vehicle access to all OnStarservices, except Virtual Advisor andOnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will need tobe changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. To changethe OnStar PIN, contact an OnStarAdvisor by pressingQ or calling1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may be warrantedas part of the vehicle warranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages. PressQ and ask for an Advisor. Advisors

are available in English, Spanish, andFrench. Available languages may varyby country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform Remote DoorUnlock or Stolen Vehicle Assistanceafter the vehicle has been offcontinuously for 10 days without anignition cycle. If the vehicle has notbeen started for 10 days, OnStar cancontact Roadside Assistance or alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global Positioning System (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can occur

in a large city with tall buildings;in parking garages; aroundairports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to call OnStar.However, OnStar could havedifficulty identifying the exactlocation.


ONSTAR 377

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals to thevehicle. Do not place items over ornear the antenna to prevent blockingcellular and GPS signal reception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverage orthe cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this message maycome on. PressQ to try the call againor try again after driving a few milesinto another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service, andGPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features tofunction properly. These systems maynot operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integrated intothe electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 257. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such as

OnStar Hands-Free Calling name tags,saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible for anyaffected or erased data or settings.These updates or changes may alsocollect personal information. Suchcollection is described in the OnStarprivacy statement or separatelydisclosed at the time of installation.These updates or changes may alsocause a system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updates orchanges and agreement that eitherOnStar or GM may remotely deliverthem to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call


378 ONSTAR

1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) orpressQ to speak with an Advisor.Users of wireless communications arecautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellularcommunications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfully interceptor access transmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://opensource.lge.com/index

www.onstar.com/us/en/

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee is herebygranted, provided that the abovecopyright notice and this permissionnotice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “ASIS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANYKIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TOTHE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRDPARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALLTHE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHTHOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANYCLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONOF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUTOF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THESOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHERDEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, thename of a copyright holder shall notbe used in advertising or otherwise topromote the sale, use or other

dealings in this Software without priorwritten authorization of the copyrightholder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyright andlicense, “Info-ZIP” is defined as thefollowing set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, RobertHeath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz,David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onnovan der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko,Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, KeithOwens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,


ONSTAR 379

Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind, expressor implied. In no event shall Info-ZIPor its contributors be held liable forany direct, indirect, incidental, specialor consequential damages arising outof the use of or inability to use thissoftware.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exception

to this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has not beenremoved from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as being Info-ZIPreleases–including, but notlimited to, labeling of the alteredversions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but notlimited to, differentcapitalizations), “Pocket UnZip,”“WiZ” or “MacZip” without theexplicit permission of Info-ZIP.Such altered versions are further

prohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and“MacZip” for its own source andbinary releases.


380 INDEX

Index AAccessories and Modifications . . . . . 260Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . . . . . 200Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . 257Additional InformationOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 267Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 174Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . .88Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . .90What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . .88What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Airbag System (cont'd)Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . .85

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . 134Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

AlertLane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . 239

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . 211Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . 235Assistance Systems for Parkingand Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229


INDEX 381

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Forward Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

BBatteryExterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Battery - North America . . . . . .275, 322Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . . . . . 278BrakeParking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Pedal and Adjustable Throttle . . . 194System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Brakes (cont'd)Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Automatic Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Bulb ReplacementHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

CCadillac Premium CareMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 275, 322,

Back CoverCanadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . 353Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . . . . .3Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312ChargingWireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135CheckEngine Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . . . . .97Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 112Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123


382 INDEX

Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . 363CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123ConnectionsOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49CoolantEngine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . 132Engine Temperature WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 174Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . 220Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Customer Assistance (cont'd)Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 358

Customer InformationService Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . 363Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . . . . .3Data CollectionInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . 163Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39DiagnosticsOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . 355Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . 228

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . .27Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 187If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Winter Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

EElectric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . 137Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . 257Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283


INDEX 383

Electrical System (cont'd)Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . 282Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 290

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

EmergencyOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Check Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . 262Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . 132Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . 202Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . 163Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . 168

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . 165Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 266Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Forward Automatic Braking . . . . . . . . 238Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207, 275Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Front SeatsHeated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 142Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Requirements, California . . . . . . . . . 244

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . 282Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 290


384 INDEX

Fuses (cont'd)Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280GaugesEngine Coolant Temperature . . . . 132Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . . . . 339Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . 165Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . 163Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Heated and Cooled Front Seats . . . . . 66Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 174High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . 187Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

How to Wear Seat Belts Properly . . . 76HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 174

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 51Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

JJump Starting - North America . . . . 322

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295LampsCornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . 163


INDEX 385

Lamps (cont'd)Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . 163Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Malfunction Indicator (CheckEngine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . . 239Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after a Crash . . . . 109

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Level ControlAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Lighting (cont'd)Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 137Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Check Engine (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . 163Lane Keep Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Service Electric Parking Brake . . . 138Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Lights (cont'd)Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Winter Driving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . 142Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . 102

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

MMagnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217MaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351


386 INDEX

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . 135Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63MessagesEngine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

MirrorChild-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview . . . . .51Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . 51Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Driver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Monitor System, Tire Pressure . . . . . 301

NNavigationOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 265Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 95Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368OnStar Additional Information . . . . 375OnStar Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372OnStar Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370OnStar Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . 90Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . . . . 260

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150


INDEX 387

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . 199Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . 82Premium Care MaintenanceCadillac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . 367

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . 362

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 275, 322,

Back Cover

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . 365Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Rear Climate Control System . . . . . . 174Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Rear Seats (cont'd)Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . 229Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . . . . 122Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . 326Reimbursement Program, GMMobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Replacing LATCH System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 366General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Ride Control SystemsMagnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . 355Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

SSafety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 366General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367


388 INDEX

Safety Defects Reporting (cont'd)U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . 361Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . .61Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . .60Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Securing Child Restraints . . . . .110, 112SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Security (cont'd)OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . 260Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . 352Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . 361Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . 239Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . 165

Special Application Services . . . . . . . 346Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . 353Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Sport Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

StepsPower Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115


INDEX 389

StrutsGas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3SystemForward Collision Alert (FCA) . . . . 235Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 368Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . 358Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Tires (cont'd)Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 300Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . 302Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . 301Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Terminology and Definitions . . . . 297Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . 309Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 247Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Towing (cont'd)Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . 255Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . 165

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . 309Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . . 158Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2


390 INDEX

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . 352Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . . . . 311Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . 307Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . 101Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Winter Driving Mode Light . . . . . . . . 139Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 278WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

2018

cadillac.com (U.S.)cadillac.ca (Canada)

2018

Escalade

84016525 A

Escalade

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

18_CAD_Escalade_COV_en_US_84016525A_2017JUN23.ai 1 6/21/2017 8:35:08 AM

C M CM Escalade - GM Canada Owner Centre · Cadillac Escalade Owner Manual...

Documents

Transcript of C M CM Escalade - GM Canada Owner Centre · Cadillac Escalade Owner Manual...